The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About111 E 3rd Street (2) Address: 111 E 3 d Street PREPARED 2/10/17, 9:28:52 INSPECTION TICKET PAGE 3 CITY OF PORT ANGELES INSPECTOR: JAMES LIERLY DATE 2/10/17 --------------- -- ADDRESS . : 111 E 3RD ST SUBDIV: CONTRACTOR ALDERGROVE CONSTRUCTION INC. PHONE (360) 457-2067 OWNER CLALLAM COUNTY PHONE PARCEL 06-30-00-0-0-5445-0000- APPL NUMBER: 16-00001187 COMM REMODEL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ _ PERMIT: BPC 00 BUILDING PERMIT - COMMERCIAL REQUESTED INSP DESCRIPTION TYP/SQ COMPLETED RESULT RESULTS/COMMENTS ----—------------------------------------------------ BL3 01 11/30/16 PB BLDG FRAMING 11/30/16 AP November 30, 2016 10:44:29 AM pbarthol. Bill 477-0057 Walt 477-0055 November 30, 2016 1:43:14 PM pbarthol. firestop for ducting at floor in place. BL99 01 2/10/17BLDG FINAL February 10, 2017 9:29:13 AM jlierly. Walt 477-0055 - ----------------------- ---------- COMMENTS AND NOTES -------------------------------------- CITY OF PORT ANGELES ir1�� "° DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY & ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT- BUILDING DI ISION Cr 321 EAST 5TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA 98362 Application Number . . . . . 16-00001187 Date 9/13/16 Application pin number . . . 444866 Property Address . . . . . . 111 E 3RD ST REPORT SALES TAX ASSESSOR PARCEL NUMBER: 06-30-00-0-0-5445-0000- Application type description COMM REMODEL on your state excise tax form Subdivision Name . . . . . . Property Use to the City of Port Angeles Property Zoning . . . . . . . COMMUNITY SHOPPING DISTR (Location Code 0502) Application valuation . . . . 405000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Application desc interior remodel 2nd floor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Owner Contractor ------------------------ ------------------------ CLALLAM COUNTY ALDERGROVE CONSTRUCTION INC. 223 E 4TH ST 336 BENSON RD. PORT ANGELES WA 98362 PORT.ANGELES WA 98363 (360) 457-2067 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Permit . . . . . . BUILDING PERMIT - COMMERCIAL Additional desc . . INTERIOR REMODEL Permit Fee . . . . 2728.25 Plan Check Fee 1773.36 \cam` Issue Date . . . . 9/13/16 Valuation . . . . 405000 Expiration Date 3/12/17 Qty Unit Charge Per Extension BASE FEE 1020.25 M305.00 5.6000 THOU BL-100,001-500K (5.60 PER K)-------1708.00 ----------------------------------------------------------- - Special Notes and Comments August 9, 2016 11:23:59 AM tamiot. ELECTRICAL PERMIT IS REQUIRED. ELECTRICAL LOAD CALCULATIONS ARE REQUIRED. IF CITY FACILITIES ARE NEEDED TO BE UPGRADED IT WILL BE AT THE EXPENSE OF THE OWNER. THIS INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CITY, STATE AND ~' LOCAL CODES! 1' September 7, 2016 11:38:42 AM pbarthol. All work interior to building. no land use problems anticipated. See Attached is the brochure on pressure washing. The contractor must provide written detail how they will prevent stormwater from entering the stormwater system. If this is not feasible then pressure washing must use water only and place a filter in the catch basin to filter out debris from the parking lot. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Other Fees . . . . . . . STATE SURCHARGE 4.50 -------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ----------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- Permit Fee Total 2728.25 2728.25 .00 .00 \!J Plan Check Total 1773.36 1773.36 .00 .00 Separate Permits are required forelectrical work,SEPA,Shoreline,ESA,utilities,private and public improvements. This permit becomes null and void if work or construction authorized is not commenced within 180 days,if construction or work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the work has commenced, or if required inspections have not been requested within 180 days from the last inspection. I hereby certify that I have read and examined this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of laws and ordinances governing this type of work will be complied with whether specified herein or'not. The granting of a permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any state or local law regulating construction or the performance of construction. NJI(� ZOIV J (a• r<wi�►� Date Print Name Signature of Contractor or Authorized Agent Signature of Owner(if owner is builder) T:Forms/Building Division/Building Permit �•� BUILDING PERMIT INSPECTION RECORD Y !-.,.PLEASE PROVIDE A MINIMUM 24-HOUR NOTICE FOR INSPECTIONS -- Building Inspections 417-4815 Electrical Inspections 417-4735 Public Works Utilities 417-4831 Backflow Prevention Inspections 417-4886 IT IS UNLAWFUL TO COVER, INSULATE OR CONCEAL ANY WORK BEFORE INSPECTED AND ACCEPTED. POST PERMIT INCONSPICUOUS LOCATION. KEEP PERMIT AND APPROVED PLANS AT JOB SITE. Inspection Type Date Accepted By Comments FOUNDATION: Footings Stemwall Foundation Drainage/Downspouts Piers Post Holes(Pole Bldgs.) PLUMBING: Under Floor/Slab Rough-in Water Line Meter to Bldg) Gas Line Back Flow/Water AIR SEAL: Walls Ceiling FRAMING: Joists/Girders/Under Floor Shear Wall/Hold Downs Walls/Roof/Ceilin Drywall Interior Braced Panel Only) T--Bar INSULATION: Slab Wall/Floor/Ceiling MECHANICAL: Heat Pump/Furnace/FAU/Ducts Rough-in Gas Line Wood Stove/Pellet/Chimney Commercial Hood/Ducts MANUFACTURED HOMES: Footing/Slab Blocking&Hold Downs Skirting PLANNING DEPT. Separate Permit#s SEPA: Parkin /Lighting ESA: Landscaping SHORELINE: FINAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY/USE Inspection Type Date Accepted By Electrical 417-4735 Construction - R.W. PW /Engineering 417-4831 ` Fire 417-4653 Planning 417-4750 Building 417-4815 CITY OF PORT ANGELES DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY & ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT- BUILDING DIVISION 321 EAST 5TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA 98362 Page 2 Application Number . . . . . 16-00001187 Date 9/13/16 Application pin number . . . 444866 REPORT SALES TAX Other Fee Total 4.50 4.50 .00 .00 Grand Total 4506.11 4506.11 .00 .00 on your state excise tax form to the City of Port Angeles (Location Code 0502) Separate Permits are required forelectrical work,SEPA,Shoreline,ESA,utilities,private and public improvements. This permit becomes null and void if work or construction authorized is not commenced within 180 days,if construction or work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the work has commenced, or if required inspections have not been requested within 180 days from the last inspection. I hereby certify that I have read and examined this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of laws and ordinances governing this type of work will be complied with whether specified herein or not. The granting of a permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any state or local law regulating construction or the performance of construction. Date Print Name Signature of Contractor or Authorized Agent Signature of Owner(if owner is builder) T:Forms/Buildin Division/Building g D sion/Building Permit BUILDING PERMIT INSPECTION RECORD PLEASE PROVIDE A MINIMUM 24-HOUR NOTICE FOR INSPECTIONS Building Inspections 417-4815 Electrical Inspections 417-4735 Public Works Utilities 417-4831 Backflow Prevention Inspections 417-4886 IT IS UNLAWFUL TO COVER, INSULATE OR CONCEAL ANY WORK BEFORE INSPECTED AND ACCEPTED. POST PERMIT INCONSPICUOUS LOCATION. KEEP PERMIT AND APPROVED PLANS AT JOB SITE. Inspection Type Date Accepted By Comments FOUNDATION: Footings Stemwall Foundation Drainage/Downspouts Piers Post Holes(Pole Bldgs.) PLUMBING: Under Floor/Slab Rough-In Water Line Meter to Bldg) Gas Line Back Flow/Water AIR SEAL: Walls Ceiling FRAMING: Joists/Girders/Under Floor Shear Wall/Hold Downs Walls/Roof/Ceiling Drywall Interior Braced Panel Only) T-Bar INSULATION: Slab Wall/Floor/Ceiling MECHANICAL: Heat Pump/Fumace/FAU/Ducts Rough-In Gas Line Wood Stove/Pellet/Chimney Commercial Hood/Ducts ME MANUFACTURED HOMES: U O S Footing/Slab Blocking&Hold Downs Skirting PLANNING DEPT. Separate Permit#s SEPA: Parkin /Lighting ESA: Landscaping SHORELINE: FINAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY/USE Inspection Type Date Accepted By Electrical 417-4735 Construction - R.W. PW /Engineering 417-4831 Fire 417-4653 Planning 417-4750 Building 417-4815 4 THE RTAN.G,� ,ECITY OF LES For City Use 4 P mit# k, 1140 W A S H I N GST O N, U. S. ate Received: 321 E 5th Street at Approved iffa Port Angeles,WA 9836 P:360-417-4817 F:360-417-4711 Email:permitsOcityofpa.us BUILDING PERMIT ICJ Project Address: 111 East 3rd Street, Port Angeles,WA 98362 Phone:360.41702429 Prima Contact:Joel G.Winborn Email:jwinborn@co.ciallam.wa.us Name Clallam County Phone 360.417.2429 Property Mailing AddressEmail jwinborn@co.clallam.wa.us 223 East 4th Street, Suite 7 �winborn@co.clallam.wa.us City Port Angeles State WA zip 98362 Name Aldergrove Construction, Inc. Phone 360.457.2067 Contractor Address 336 Benson Rd. Email waltd@aldergroveci.com Information City Port Angeles State WA Zip 98363 Contractor License# Exp.Date: Legal Description: Zoning: Tax Parcel# Project Value: (materials and labor) Sec. 3,T 30N, R6W-Lots 12/13 CSD 0630000 005445 $ 405,000 Residential ❑ Commercial ❑ Industrial ❑ Public 8 Permit Demolition 8 Fire ❑ Repair ❑ Reroof(tear off/lay over) ❑ Classification For the following.fill out both pages of permit application: (check New Construction ❑ Exterior Remodel ❑ Addition ❑ Tenant Improvement ❑ appropriate) Mechanical ❑ Plumbing ❑ Other 8 Fire Sprinkler System Proposed Irrigation System Proposed or Proposed Bathrooms Proposed Bedrooms or Existing? Yes ❑ No ❑ Existing? Yes ❑ No ❑ In addition to standard hard copy submittals please send a PDF copy of all Stormwater plans and Engineering to www.storrnwater@_citxo4)a,us Project Descri tion Demolition and remodel of existing upper floor to be used as county Health &Human Services Office space. Is project in a Flood Zone: Yes ❑ Nob Flood Zone Type: If in a Flood Zone, what is the value of the structure before proposed improvement? $ I have read and completed the application and know it to be true and correct.I am authorized to apply for this permit and understand that it is my responsibility to determine what permits are required and to obtain permits prior to work. I understand that plan review fees are not refundable after review has occurred. I understand that I will forfeit review fees if I withdraw the application before the permit is issued. I understand that if the permit is not picked up/issued within igo days of submittal,the application will be considered abandoned and the fees will be forfeited. r July 26, 2016 Joel G.Winborn Date Print Name Signature L . Residential Structures Existing Proposed Construction For Office Use Area Descriptions(SQ FT) Floor area Floor area $Value new area Basement First Floor Second Floor Covered Deck/Porch/Entry Deck(over 30"or 2" floor) Garage Carport Other(describe) Area Totals Commercial Structures Area Descriptions(SQ FT) Existing Proposed Construction For Office Use Floor area Floor area $Value new area Existing Structure(s) 3875 400,000 Yes Proposed Addition NA Tenant Improvement? NA Other work(describe) Site Area Totals Lot/Site Coverage Calculations Lot Size(sq ft) Lot Coverage(sq ft)foot print of %Lot Coverage (Total lot cov-lot size) Max Bldg Height all structures sq ft I Existing-NA Site Coverage(Sq Ft of all impervious) %of Site Coverage(total site cov-lot size) Existing-no changes to footprint Mechanical Fixtures Indicate how many of each type of fixture to be installed or relocated as part of this project. Air Handler Size: # Haz/Non-Haz Piping Outlets: NA Appliance Exhaust Fan # Heater(Suspended,Floor,Recessed wall) # NA NA Boiler/Compressor Size: # Heating/Cooling Heating/Coolingappliance # NA repair/alteration NA Evaporative Cooler(attached,not # Pellet Stove/Wood-burning/Gas # portable) NA Fireplace/Gas Stove/Gas Cook Stove/Misc. NA Fuel Gas Piping #of Outlets: Ventilation Fan,single duct # NA NA Furnace/Heat Pump/ Size: # Ventilation System # Forced Air Unit NA NA .Plumbing Fixtures Indicate how many of each type of fixture to be installed or relocated Plumbing Traps �#A Water Heater # Plumbing Vent piping # Medical gas piping #of Outlets: NA Water Line n#A Fuel gas piping #of Outlets: Sewer Line # Industrial waste pretreatment NA intercept r Grease Trap) Size Other(describe): T:\Forms\2015 CED Form Updates\Building&Permitting\BP\Building Permit 20150415.docx ALLEY PARKINS LOT EXISTING BUILDING AREA OF WORK OPER LEVEL ONLY) MA4 PAR=MSM 0630000 006446 WC. 3,T30K R6W LOTS$12 a 0 ROCK,64 zOPmG PARKINS LOT EAST 3RD 5TREET SITE PLAN SCALE= 1/8'•1'-O' 92'-10 1/4" :MO LEGEND -e7-53 '-8 NOTE:HOT WATER IS SUPPLIED TO A CONTINUOUS LINE ARE TO REMAIN; THIS LEVEL OF THE BUILDING FROM A DASHED LINE ARE TO BE REMOVED DO i 1 p A WATERHEATER LOCATED AT LEVEL =SS INDICATED OTHERWISE. lt✓� 1 JANITOR CLOSET. ELECTRICAL/DATA/TELEPHONE D013 FE 1L SWITCHES,ETC.AND ASSOCIATED ® D007 2E TO BE REMOVED WHEN DEVICES D009 NDICATED TO BE REMOVED. ® D009 L��J OUTLET TO BE REMOVED. D013 D006 D009 `J '.CTRICAL/DATA TOBEREMOVED; D011 DO14 @014 @014 0014 D012 D014 IFLOORING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW - _ INSTALLATION. a � — D010 P. D002 D010 P. D010 �_ D009 ;\ D009 D009 i D009 D009 ASSOCIATE PLUMBING TO BE - PATCH FLOOR WITH CONC. j�--------\-=a7 D005 ii ii ,T -al •• II`_-________ t---�J \ ii D018 it ii ALL ASSOCIATED PLUMBING TO BE ` \ D007 II � - =_d r---------= ii rII D001 P. 0001 P. D001 P. �I+-Ott )OOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN. DOOR AND RE-PAINT FRAME. 'P. II D002 D008 P. iii' i i D008 P. Ce===\=______====;1 ii D008 P. )0 RAND FRAME TO BE REMOVED. )OOR FOR RE-USE ON THIS �P---+--- - 3EE UNIT PRICES. -_-� --------- 0001 P. i -- I P--- cZ3 GUISHER TO BE REMOVED AND i i i i� D003 i i i ii FOR OWNER'S RE-USE. I r--------------a III 5r---------- D005 l h D002 i r n LL =MO LEGEND F=_______=__J �} ll D005 \ I �, ' D001 P. I I CONTINUOUS LINE ARE TO REMAIN; U O'-85/8" DASHED LINE ARE TO BE REMOVED % 2� 1) 9.0�14" .SS INDICATED OTHERWISE. D005 D005 D005 i , DO09 i 0=0 II 009 n D002 i� (f• II l G SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING D009 D009 �_ --- I TO BE REMOVED. D009 D010 P. D010E i i DO10 P• D010 P. D010 P. _ G FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE, ATED BACKBOXES AND WIRING TO BE D014 D014 D014 D014 D014 Q014 D014 D014 -D. G WALL LIGHT FIXTURE TO REMAIN NOTE:PRESSURE WASH BOTH )UNTED THERMOSTAT TO BE SOUTH STAIRWELLS INSIDE AND OUT VED,SEE MECH. INCLUDING STEPS ALARM TO BE RELOCATED.SEE 2-2 VITCH TO BE REMOVED. CAL PANEL TO BE REMOVED;SEE CAL PLAN. DEMOLITION FLOOR FL-At r )VIDED AND70 92'-10114" NOTE:SEE DETAIL 3tA2-2 FOR OR COORDINATE 67'-5314" 12'-81/4" WORKATUPPERIARKINGLOT /" 1'-51/8" 11'•61/4" 9'-7" 9'61/8" 9'41/8" 9'-41/2" 3'•8"MIN 2MERS ABOVE UPPER IRDS BEHIND �y ¢ / N N WASTE. e _ _ A202 LAN EQUIPMENT IS ME TL 22 I II I I'4 AISLq_ 224A 224 o A202 -?31_ A203 JG LAN EQUIPMENT ® A206 INTERS AND PHONES a ;I I;� I I N -6" '°'202VNI NNECTED TO THE A201 1 MER PREMISES ��® I I—III , 13 A201 P. M S T. �IIITI� o o H THIRD STREET A202 I I IS CURRENTLY 226A A210 2 1 A204 :.THAT CPE WILL I I-- A9_1 A205 q :R TO THE NETWORK ? e c "" FE 1 1 1 1 FE STAFF AREA 1OR TO DEMOLITION. A201 A201 206 HE UPS AND �� A201 A201 J THE DOWNSTAIRS �o AISLE HS OFFICE HS OFFICE HS OFFICE HS OFFICE EH OFFICE EH OFFICE re 229 212 211 210 209 208 207 11 fWITH WAVE0'U. ST GE STUDENTOFFICEILABLE FROM THE ' 13 1 1 0 c c o 205 0 THE SECOND N N N N N N TWORK CABLING ON 'P 1 205A 8'-11 3/4" 2'-3 5'-01/2" 5'-2" 9'-81/4" AISLE 40'•10 3/8" '-81/4" 4'-10" 4LLED BY OWNER 3A 230 204A 1 ORE CEILING TILES 2238 r-� - 3 2 FILE/WORK A207 �¢ A EH OFFICE 1 IT LO ET 221 204 R A208 P. 1 A214 A207 A204 A9-1 A2 4 2 2 3 3 222A A208 CONS ------ L 214 3 A211 2 A 27E 3 `V t EH OFFICE 203 u 214Aa �m. i m 1 1 ao rn 1 0 11-=1 I1- 1ow 215A -III=I. N N N hI�"RECEPTIO��:I'! VESTS LE 1 III=201 'III` 202A ow 1 q N HHS OFFICE I�I(I:: HHS OFFICE HHS OFFICE HHS OFFICE HHS OFFICE EH O20FICE ( _ _ EH OOFZ ICE A201 TYa. a A201 r. N N 4 N 4 4 NOTE:LEVEL 1,WEST AND EAST EXIT STAIRS WILL REQUIRE NEW LEVEL IS. EXISTING TTO REMAIN LOCKSETS:SEE HARDWARE AND IS LOCATED IN LEVEL 7 SECTION 057100.THE NEW I NOTE:INSULATED GLAZ NG IS TO BE REMOVED STORAGE AREA;VERIFY LOCKSET IS TO REPLACE A - V AND REPLACED WITH N VAT THESE LOCATIONS; LOCATION WITH OWNER. DEAOBOLT AND LATCHSET. SIZES ARE TO BE VERT ED: DEMARCATION LOCATION; DOORS WILL NEED TO BE (1)AT 14.5'X 44" SEE FLOOR PLAN 4L CEILING SYSTEM; MODIFIED TO ACCEPT NEW (3)AT14.5'X35• ELECTRICAL LEGEND- INSTALLATION.ASSUME DOORS DEDICATED TELEPHONE NOTE:FOLLOWING ARE TO BE REM GVED,MODIFIED OUTLET CONSTRUCTION, IN SHOP,REINSTALLED AND PROFESSI0 14ALLYCLEANALL REPAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING FIRST FLOOR AND SECOND CONDITION. .c..n.in^ n c+inn +m+n pro +m n^ or en o e+l+a ++ +]l0 0�o R/o^ 17•-1G]IR^ FLOOR WINDOWS,INSIDE AND I i � Ciallam County II 3rd Street Building � Level 2 Remodel � Ciallam County Project No. � 621606TS 1 I ' S CIFICATIONS June 2016 � me Board of Ciallam�oun,v Commissioners ' Mike Chapman, Chair Mark Ozias Bill Peach 1 ' Architects Project No. 16101 FIBER BETWEEN THE FIRST FLOOR NETWORK CLOSET AND THE SECOND FLOOR IT CLOSET. 1. Existing fiber plant: a. Prior to demolition,a 6-strand fiber cable running between the first floor network closet and the second floor will be pulled back.from the second floor and stored in the ceiling above the first floor network closet. b. This fiber cable has two stands terminated on each end with SC connectors. c. One end of the fiber is terminated in a wall mounted fiber enclosure in the first floor network closet. d. The other end of the fiber had been terminated in a similar wall mounted fiber enclosure on the second floor.This enclosure will be available for reuse. 2. Needed: a. Provide a pathway for a fiber cable between the first floor network closet and the second floor IT CLOSET. b. Perform one of the following i. Reuse existing partially terminated fiber cable and fiber enclosure 1. Route this fiber cable to the second floor IT CLOSET. 2. Mount the used fiber enclosure in the second floor IT CLOSET or provide a rack-mounted fiber tray. 3. Terminate with SC connectors a second pair of fiber strands in both the first floor network closet and the second floor IT closet. 4. Mount all terminated fiber strands, and store unused fiber strands, in the appropriated fiber enclosure. _ ii. Use new multi-mode fiber cable and fiber enclosure 1. Route this new fiber cable between the first floor network closet and the second floor IT CLOSET. 2. Mount new fiber trays in the two-post racks in both the first floor network closet and the second floor IT CLOSET. 3. Terminate with LC connectors two pair of fiber strands in both the first floor network closet and the second floor IT closet. 4. Mount all terminated fiber strands, and store unused fiber strands, in the fiber trays. c. All terminated fiber strands will be tested for proper functionality and must meet applicable standards. Clallam County IT Department Requirements for 3`d Street Building Level 2 Remodel NETWORK JACKS,CABLING,PATCH PANELS,AND WALLPLATES. 1. All components will-be installed according to relevant building codes. 2. Cabling will be Cat 5e. 3. Plenum-rated cable will be used where required. 4. All cable terminations will be according to the TIA/EIA 5688 specification. S. All network wall jacks will be cabled back to patch panel jacks in Room 223 "IT CLOSET". 6. Each network location indicated will have two network jacks installed. 7. If firestops are required for wall penetrations, new firestops must be provided. Existing wall penetrations with firestops are not to be utilized without the permission of Clallam County Information Technology. 8. All jacks, patch panels,and wallplates will be Leviton QuickPort-compatible. 9. Leviton 49255-H48 Flat QuickPort Patch Panels will be used. Patch panels will be mounted in a Clallam County-supplied two-post rack in Room 223 "IT CLOSET". The exact mounting location within the rack will be determined at installation in consultation with Clallam County Information Technology. 10. Leviton 56110-RE5 eXtreme Cat 5e QuickPort Connectors, Black, will be used to terminate cabling at the patch panels. 11. Leviton 5G110-RO5 eXtreme Cat 5e QuickPort Connectors, Orange, will be used to terminate cabling at the wallplates. 12. Leviton 41081-4WP (color selected by Clallam County, Fair and Facilities), 41081-4TP (color selected by Clallam County, Fair and Facilities), or 41081-41P (color selected by Clallam County, Fair and Facilities) Angled Single-Gang QuickPort Wallplates, 4-Port, will be used to mount network wall jacks. The wall jacks will be mounted in the two upper holes of the wallplates. Covers will remain in place in unused wallplate holes. 13. Network jack labeling. o Network jacks in wallplates will be labeled"rrr-wa"where: ■ "rrr" is the room number ■ "w" is the sequential number, starting at 1, of the wallplate within the room, starting with the wallplate arrived at by moving clockwise around the room from the door into the room. ■ "a" is the sequential jack letter, starting at A, of the network jack within the wallplate.A is the upper left, B is the upper right,C is the lower left,and D is the lower right. o A period "." maybe used in place of a hyphen"-" in the jack label to shorten the string. o Alternatively, wallplates may be labeled "rrr-w" and each jack within the wallplate may be labeled "a". 14. Patch panel jacks will be labeled to match the label of the network wall jack to which it is connected. 15. Regardless of final labeling used,each patch panel jack and wall port jack must be identifiable as to the room number,wallplate member,and jack letter of the network jack. 16. All terminated cable runs will be tested for proper functionality and must meet 1000Base-T standards. Beaman Architecture, Ltd. Per Washington State Law, this P.O. Box 86038 document is not to be altered by Portland, Oregon 97286 anyone other than the Author. (503)236-3300 a528 REGISTERED ADDENDUM A ARCHITECT TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR HAEL .BEAMA Clallam County STATE OF WASHINGTON P Street Building Level 2 Remodel Clallam County Project No.621606TS July 7,2016 This ADDENDUM supersedes the original SPECIFICATIONS and DRAWINGS; dated June 2016,wherein it contradicts them; all other conditions remain unchanged. Prior Addenda: None Acknowledgement of receipt of this ADDENDUM is required. 1. MODIFICATIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS: A. SECTION 26000, Paragraph 1.3-A:ADD the following: 1. "Also reference attached requirements entitled"Clallam County IT Department Requirements" that shall be part of Contractors scope of work for Data and Telecommunications." Noted Requirements are attached herein this Addendum. B. SECTION 261400-1.1-B:ADD the following: 1. "Cover plate color as selected by Clallam County, Fair and Facilities." 2. DESCRIPTIVE MODIFICATIONS TO DRAWINGS A. None. 3. GRAPHIC MODIFICATIONS TO DRAWINGS A. None. 4. APPROVALS The following manufacturers and/or materials are hereby accepted subject to compliance with the specified requirements. Where a model number, type or catalog number has been specified an equivalent model number, type or catalog number shall apply to the manufacturer and/or material hereby accepted: A. None. 5. QUESTIONS A. None. END OF ADDENDUM NO.A Beaman Architecture, Ltd. CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ADDENDUM A, Page 1 Ciallam County � 3rd Street Building � Level 2 Remodel � Clailarn County Project No. � 621606TS 1 SPECIFICATIONS � June 2016 ' For: The Board of Clallam County Commissioners '. , Mike Chapman, Chair Mark Ozias Bill Peach 1 ' Architects Project No. 16101 1 1 i i 1 4528 REGISTERED ARCHITECT HAEL .BEAMA STATE OF WASHINGTON r ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL TABLE OF CONTENTS Note: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify that each Project Manual contains the pages listed in this Table of Contents. SPECIFICATION LIST ' DIVISION 00: BIDDING AND AWARD REQUIREMENTS 001000 NOTICE OF CALL FOR BIDS 002000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' 003000 BID PROPOSAL FORM 004000 SUPPLEMENTAL BID FORMS 005000 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER &CONTRACTOR 006000 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 008600 LIST OF DRAWINGS 010010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012200 UNIT PRICES 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Architect's Supplemental Instructions Form Contract Administration Change Order Form 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Application and Certification for Payment Form (AIA Document G702) Application and Certification for Payment Continuation Form (AIA Document G703) 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES ' 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION ' 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS TABLE OF CONTENTS Pagel i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS ' DIVISION 08: OPENINGS ' 080000 DOOR SCHEDULE 081113 HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Door Hardware Schedule 088000 GLAZING , DIVISION 09: FINISHES 090000 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 099100 PAINTING DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 102800 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 123623.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS ' 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES- DIVISION RAMESDIVISION 20: MECHANICAL ' 200100 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) 200500 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS &METHODS (Performance Specification) , 202500 MECHANICAL INSULATION (Performance Specification) DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING (Performance Specification) DIVISION 23: HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 rCLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL r DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 261100 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) 261200 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 261400 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES (Performance Specification) 264000 SERVICE, METERING, DISTRIBUTION AND PANELBOARDS (Performance Specification) 264500 GROUNDING (Performance Specification) 265000 LIGHTING (Performance Specification) ' DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 ASPHALT PAVING ' END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS r r t r r r r r r r TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 DIVISION ZERO Notice of Call for Bids cvl Section 00100 CLALLAM COUNTY PARKS, FAIR & FACILITIES DEPARTMENT .NOTICE OF CALL FOR BIDS ' SEALED BIDS will be received by the Board of Clallam County Commissioners 223 East Fourth Street, Room 150, Port Angeles, Washington until 10:00 a.m.on Tuesday,July 26, 2016 for: -Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel- Complete drawings and specifications may be obtained from Pen Print, Inc., 230 E. 15t Street, Port Angeles, WA 98362, phone 360.457.3404. All bidding and related questions should be directed to Beaman Architecture, Ltd in writing at mb(a-)-beamanarch.com Attention: Michael Beaman. The sealed bids must be clearly marked on the outside of the envelope, "BID PROPOSAL—Clallam County 3rd Street Building L6V6 2;Remodel".Address btd proposal to Board of Clallam County Commissioners, 223 East 4 Street, Sui#e 4, Por#Angeles,Washington 9$362 or hand-deliver to 223 East 40i Street, Room 150, Port Angeles,Washington Bid documents received`late by the Commissioners'Office, delivered to other offices, received by fax or email or by any other means will not be considered. Late bids will be returned unopened. Note: All Bids shall include a 5% Bid Bond on a form approved by Clallam County. , Clallam County hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 at 49 CFR Part 23 will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,color, national origin, or sex in consideration for an award. Clallam County will determine the lowest responsible bidder in accordance with the terms of Clallam County Code Section 3.12.070 and reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive minor informalities in the process or to accept the bid, which in its estimation best serves the interests of Clallam County. Bidders on Washington State Dept.of Labor& Industries or federal debarment list are prohibited from bidding on this project. Construction Timeframe: 120 Calendar Days from Contract Award . There will be an on-site walk-through conducted Thursday,July 14, 2016 at 11:00 AM. All ' interested bidders are to meet at the site, located at 111 East 3rdStreet, Port Angeles,WA. This Will be the'onty ot�oortunity for bidders to review the as-built`conditions. Bring any tools, equipment,etc., needed for personal documentation. Owner and/or the Owners representative will be on site throughout the afternoon to answer questions and provide access for bidders. A bidder's absence will be considered as part of the Bidder responsibility criteria as set forth in Section 00200 ARTICLE 2 of the Project Manual. APPROVED this .0-0 day of 2016. BOARD OF CLALLAM COUNTY ATTEST: I COMMISSIONERS: b Mike Chapman, Chair Trish Holden,CMC, Clerk of the Board Publish: July 3& 10, 2016(PDN) Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Notice of Call for Bids Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities r DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 002000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. Bidding Requirements include Advertisement and Notice of Call for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid ' Forms, Sample Contract Forms, and Supplementary Instructions. Contract documents consist of Agreement or Contract Form between Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract including General, Supplementary, Drawings, Plans, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Addenda are written or graphic instructions issued by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect, which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.3 A Bid is a properly completed and signed proposal to do the work for sums stipulated and submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.4 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform work described as the base to which work may be added or deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.5 An Alternate Bid is an amount stated in the Bid to be added or deducted from the Base Bid if Alternate work is accepted. 1.6 A Unit Price is an amount stated in Bid as a price per unit for materials, equipment, or service as described in Bidding Documents. 1.7 A Bidder is person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.8 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 2.1 By making a Bid, the Bidder represents that the Bidder has visited the site and become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, has read and understands all Bidding and Contract Documents, and correlated personal observations with the requirements of the proposed ' contract documents. Site visits shall be as stated on Notice of Call for Bids. 2.2 The Bid is based upon materials, equipment, labor and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS ' 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents from the location designated in the Advertisement or Notice of Call for Bids, at no charge. (Each set consists of(1) Project Manual,which includes Drawings and Specifications, with a limit of two(2) sets per bidder). All bidders shall return documents within seven (7) days of bid opening. A bidder receiving the Contract Award may retain Documents. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 002000 3.1.2 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding documents in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Owner's representative Architect assumes responsibility or errors or misrepresentations resulting from use of incomplete Bidding Documents. 3.1.3 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available, the Owner and/or Owner's representative Architect, do so for the purpose of obtaining Bids and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. I ' 3.1.4 Copies of bidding documents and specs are available for review in Parks Office, Room 180 in the Old Courthouse. 3.2 Interpretation or correction of Bidding Documents 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully examine the Bidding Documents, examine the site and local conditions, and compare them with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to work being Bid, and shall at once report to the Owner and/or Owner's representative Architect errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 The Bidder and sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request to Owner and/or Owner's representative Architect at lease seven days prior to date of receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Changes in the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum and changes made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions 3.3.1 The materials, equipment, products described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by Owner or Owner's representative Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the materials or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contractors that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden or proof of the P P P q merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Owner's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Owner approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. specifically 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless provided in the Contract Documents. 3.3.5 Should any proposed product substitution require any redesign work by the Owner and/or ' Architect or his consultations to accommodate the substitute product, costs for such redesign work shall be included in the Bid amount and shall be paid to the Architect or Owner at his usual rates for the time expended in the required redesign work. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Instructions to Bidders , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities I DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 002000 ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES ' 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identified to ones included in the Bidding Documents; shall have all blanks filled out in ink(typed or manually); with sums expressed in words and figures where indicated with words governing; and all alternates and unit prices bid. If alternates do not change Base Bid, enter ' "no change". 4.1.2 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by signer of the Bid. 4.1.3 Bid shall include legal name of Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a corporation shall give the state of incorporation or corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 Bid security 4.2.1 If so stated in the Advertisement or Notice of Call for Bids, or in Bidding Documents, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in a.) cash, b.)cashier's check/money order, c.)certified check, or d.) Surety Bond in the amount of 5%of the total Bid amount. Bid security shall be in form required, pledging that the Bidder will enter a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in Bid, and will furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. ' Bid security of the lowest three Bidders may be retained by Owner for a period not to exceed 30 days following opening of Bids. All other Bidders' securities shall be returned within ten days of date of receipt of bids. Should Bidder fail to enter into a Contract or furnish bonds where required, the amount of Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. 4.2.2 Surety Bond shall be written on required forms and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond shall affix to the Bond a certified and current copy of the power-of-attorney. t4.3 Submission of bids 4.3.1 Bids, Bid Security and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed, opaque envelope marked with the notation "SEALED BID"with project name clearly marked on the outside of the envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving Bids as identified in the Advertisement or Notice Call for Bids and include the Bidder's name and address. If Bid is sent by 1 mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with notation"SEALED BID ENCLOSED"and the project name on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after time and date will be returned unopened. The Bidders shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.3 Oral, telephone, telegraphic, or fax Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or withdrawal of Bid ' 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period of thirty days following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 002000 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or r withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids ' provided that they are then fully in conformance with these instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid Security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS ' 5.1 Bids received on time and properly identified will be opened and read aloud at the Board of , Commissioners meeting held immediately after the time and date for receipt of Bids as advertised in Notice Call for Bids. 5.2 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required Bid Security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid, which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 The Owner may determine that a Bidder is not responsible and reject his proposal for any of the reasons found in Clallam County Code 3.12. 5.4 Bid award , 5.4.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid, which in the Owners judgment, is in the Owner's best interests. 5.4.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 Contractor's Qualification Statement- Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under , consideration shall submit to the Owner or Owner's representative Architect, upon request, a properly executed Contractor's Qualification Statement in the form requested by the Owner. 6.2.1 Submittals-The Bidder shall,within three days of notification of selection for the award of a ' Contract, furnish the Owner or Owner's representative Architect in writing if not required to be included on the Bid Proposal Form: 1. Work to be performed by Bidders own forces ' 2. A complete list of sub-bidders or sub-contractors to be used to complete this project 3. Name of project superintendent or foreman to be used 4. Names of manufacturers, products, and supplies of principal items or systems , proposed for the Work. 5. Schedule of Values per Section 012900"Payment Procedures". Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Instructions to Bidders , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities ' DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 002000 ' 6.2.2 Prior to award of the Contract, the Owner, or Owner's representative Architect, will notify Bidder if Owner has a reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by Bidder. If Owner has objection, the Bidder may(1)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment 1 in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost, if any, occasioned by the substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of withdrawal or disqualification, the Bid Security will not be forfeited. ' 6.2.3 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner has made no reasonable objection must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner. 6.2.4 A copy of Contractor's UBI Certification shall be submitted with the signed agreement. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond requirements I 7.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance and payment of all obligations, and as described, in the Bidding Documents and all bonds, shall be paid for by the Bidder and costs shall be included in Bid. ' 7.2 Time of delivery and form of bonds 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on forms provided by Owner, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum plus sales tax. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT 8.1 Form to be used 8.1.1 The Agreement for the Work shall be the completed sample included in the Bidding Documents ' and shall be signed by the Bidder within ten days of notice by the Owner of award of Contract to the Bidder. END OF SECTION 002000 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 003000 BID PROPOSAL FORM ' Project: Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel ' Project Number: 621606TS To: CLALLAM COUNTY PARKS, FAIR& FACILITIES DEPARTMENT ' Submission of this Bid Proposal certifies that the Undersigned has examined the Project site and the Conditions of Work; and has carefully read and thoroughly understands the Bidding Documents governing the Work embraced iq this Project, has been completely forthcoming with knowledge obtained during the ' Bidding process that may affect the ultimate quality construction of the Project and understands the method by which payment will be made for said work. The Undersigned hereby proposes to undertake and complete the work embraced in this project in accordance with said Bidding Documents and agrees to accept as payment for said work the amounts indicated below under Bid Proposal. The base bid shall , include all work except that indicated in the Alternates. The Undersigned acknowledges that payment will be based on the actual work performed, as measured , or provided for in accordance with the said contract documents; Base Bid, Alternates and Unit Prices shall not include State of Washington Sales Tax. Appropriate sales tax is to be added to invoice amounts after award of bid. BID PROPOSAL ' BASE BID AMOUNT OF ' dollars ($ ). ' UNIT PRICES The undersigned further agrees that the following unit prices are proposed for additions and/or deductions ' required and approved during the course of the Work for the categories enumerated; and that these prices are complete, including all overhead, expenses and Contractor's profit subject to provisions of the Supplementary Conditions. Item and Unit of Measure Deduction a) Re-use existing owner-accepted, solid core wood door in lieu of base ' bid new solid core wood door. $ /Door CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF BIDDING &CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' By signing this form, the Contractor certifies that based on the Contractor's knowledge and review, that the Contractor finds the Bidding Contract Documents sufficiently complete and in sufficient detail to ' perform the work required. BID GUARANTEE (See Bid Bond Form attached) , The Undersigned furnishes herewith a bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the total Base Bid proposal lump sum amount and attaches same to the proposal. This bid guarantee warrants that the undersigned will not withdraw his proposal for a period of thirty(30) days after the scheduled closing time for the receipt ' of proposals, and that if this proposal is accepted, the undersigned will enter into a formal contract Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Bid Proposal Form , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 003000 (prepared by the Owner) and that the required performance bond and payment bond will be given. In the event of the withdrawal of this proposal within the period stipulated above, or the failure of the undersigned to enter into a contract and give the required bonds, the undersigned will be liable to the Owner for the full amount of the bid guarantee as liquidated damages on account of the default of the undersigned. A proposal guaranty in an amount of five percent (5%) of the total bid, in the form as indicated below, is attached hereto: Check: ( ) CASH IN THE AMOUNT OF $ ' ( )CASHIER'S CHECK/POSTAL MONEY ORDER $ ' ( ) CERTIFIED CHECK PAYABLE TO CLALLAM COUNTY$ $ ( ) PROPOSED BOND IN THE AMOUNT OF 5% OF THE BID $ 1 NON-COLLUSION STATEMENT By signing this proposal, the Contractor certifies that he/she has not participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with this project for which this proposal is submitted. NON-DISCRIMINATION The Contractor hereby agrees to not discriminate against any person on the basis of race, creed, political ideology, color, national origin, sex, marital status, sexual orientation, age or presence of any sensory, mental or physical disability. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATEMENT The Contractor certifies that services shall be furnished by the Contractor, as an independent contractor and nothing herein contained shall be construed to create a relationship of employer/employee or 1 master/servant, but all payments made hereunder and all services performed shall be made and performed pursuant to this Agreement by the Contractor. 1 ADDENDA Receipt of Addenda(s) numbered is hereby acknowledged and all costs of the Work therefore have been included in the Bid Proposal. BIDDER NAME AND SIGNATURE The name of the Bidder submitting this proposal, the address and phone number to which all communications concerned with this proposal shall be made and the number which has been assigned ' indicating the Bidder is licensed to do business in the State of Washington are as follows: Firm Name: ' Address: Telephone ( ) Contractor's License No. Exp.Date ' The firm submitting this proposal is a: Sole Proprietorship Corporation Partnership Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Bid Proposal Form Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 003000 The names and titles of the principal officers of the corporation submitting this proposal, or of the ' partnership, or of all persons interested in this proposal as principals are as follows: SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICIAL(S) (PROPOSAL MUST BE SIGNED) ' (Seal) FIRM NAME ' END OF SECTION 003000 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Bid Proposal Form ' Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 004000 ' SUPPLEMENTAL BID FORMS ARTICLE 1 -The Bid Bond format listed below shall be used by Bidders when submitting ' their Bid Bond. ' KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we (here insert full name&address or legal title of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (here insert full name&address or legal title of Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the ' State of as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) ' as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Dollars($ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ' WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (here insert full name,address and description of project) ' NOW,THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding of Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the Prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof,or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid,then this obligation ' shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this day of 20 (Principal) (Seal) ' (Witness) (Title) (Surety) (Seal) (Witness) (Title) Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 004000 ARTICLE 2 -STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS ' When requested by the Owner, Contractor shall complete and submit the below information within three ' days of notification by Owner. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Business Address: , 3. How many years has said bidder been engaged in the-contracting business under the present firm name? ' 4. Contracts now in hand (Gross Amount): 5. General character of work performed by said company: , 6. List of more important projects constructed by said company, including approximate costs and dates: 7. List of company's major equipment: ' 8. Bank References: 9. Department of Labor and Industries Firm No.: , 10. Department of Revenue Registration: Name of Bidder Title ' By Date , Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities ' DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 004000 ' ARTICLE 3 -STATEMENT OF PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS The Contractor shall submit a complete list of all major material suppliers and a sub-contractor's list within three days of notification of Bid award or upon request by the Owner. NOTE: Per RCW39.30.060, projects expected to cost one million dollars or more are required,as part of the ' Bid or within one hour after the published Bid Submittal Time,to submit a subcontractor list. Failure to submit this information shall render the Bid Non-responsive. (See RCW39.30.060 for full text) Sub-Contractor's List NAME&ADDRESS DESCRIPTION OF WORK/MATERIAL MATERIAL SUPPLIERS Building Clallam County 3rd Street Bu g Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 004000 ARTICLE 4 - RETAINAGE INVESTMENT OPTION DECLARATION , CONTRACTOR: t PROJECT NAME: Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 621606TS , Pursuant to RCW 60.28.010, as amended, you may choose how your Retainage under this contract will be held and invested. Please complete and sign this form indicating your preference. If you fail to do so, ' the County will hold your Retainage as described in"Current Expense" Option 1 below: 1. Current Expense: The County will retain the money in its Current Expense Fund , Account until thirty days following final acceptance of the improvement or work as completed. You will not receive interest earned on this money. 2. Interest Bearinq Account: The County will deposit Retainage checks in an interest ' bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association, not subject to withdrawal until after the final acceptance of the improvement or work is completed, or until agreed to by both parties. Interest on the account will be paid to ' you. 3. Escrow/Investments: the County will place the Retainage checks in escrow with a ' bank or trust company until thirty days following the final acceptance to the improvement or work as completed. When the moneys reserved are to be placed in escrow, the County will issue a check representing the sum of the moneys reserved payable to the bank or trust company and you jointly. This check will be converted ' into bonds and securities chosen by you and approved by the County and these bonds and securities will be held in escrow. Interest on these bonds and securities will be paid to you as interest accrues. 4. The Contractor may at his/her option choose to not submit a performance bond and agrees to a 50% Retainage in lieu of a performance bond. Retainage to be released when Contract is complete and all paperwork submitted. (Pertains to projects under ' $25,000 ONLY) Retainage is normally released 30-40 days after final acceptance of work by the County, or , following receipt of Labor and Industries Department of Revenue clearance, whichever takes longer. (Contractor's Signature) , (Title) ' ARTICLE 5 - PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORM , The Contractor will use AIA Document A312 Forms, as revised, as the acceptable forms when providing bonds. ' Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities 1 DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 004000 ARTICLE 6 - INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE PREMIUMS AND CONFESSION OF JUDGMENT 1. The contractor shall pay, and is responsible for payment of, all industrial insurance premiums that become due and payable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries(Department) pursuant to Title 51, RCW, whether such premiums are attributable to the contractor or its subcontractors. ' 2. In the event that Clallam County is required to make industrial insurance premiums to the Department due to the failure, neglect or refusal of the contractor to make payment as required herein, the contractor authorizes Clallam County to take judgment against it, and-the contractor hereby confesses ' judgment, in the amount which Clallam County is required to pay the Department pursuant to Title 51, RCW to satisfy contractor's liabilities hereunder. The contractor confesses judgment in an amount equal to the entire industrial insurance premium liability due to the Department on behalf of the contractor and its ' subcontractors hereunder, less any premium payments previously made to the Department by the contractor. 3. The contractor expressly agrees that the amount confessed herein was expressly negotiated and ' that the amount due to Clallam County for satisfying contractor's obligations to the Department hereunder is due,justly due or to become due. ' 4. Until such time as Clallam County is actually reimbursed for industrial insurance premiums paid to the Department due to the failure, neglect or refusal of the contractor to meet its obligations hereunder, the contractor shall be debarred from bidding on any projects for which Clallam County solicits bids. ' Corporate: State of ) ss County of ) On this day of 20 , before me personally appeared ' , to me known to be the (president, vice president, secretary, treasurer, or other authorized officer or agent, as the case may be) of the corporation that executed the within and foregoing instrument, and acknowledged said instrument to be the free and voluntary act and deed of said corporation, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned, and on oath stated that he was authorized to execute said instrument and that the seal affixed is the corporate seal of said corporation. In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal the day and year first above written. ' (CORPORATE SEAL) (Contractor's Signature) (Title) Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms , Section 004000 Individual: ' State of ) ' ss County of ) On this day personally appeared before me to me known to be the , individual, or individuals described in and who executed the within and foregoing instrument, and acknowledged that he (she or they) signed the same as his (her or their)free and voluntary act and deed, , for the uses and purposes therein mentioned. Given under my hand and official seal this day of , 20 (Contractor's Signature) (Title) Notary Public in and for the State of Washington ' Residing at END OF SECTION 004000 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Supplemental Bid Forms , CIA=County Parks,Fair&Facilities ' DIVISION ZERO Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 005000 ' FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Project Name: CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL Project Number: 621606TS This agreement is entered into between Clallam County, a political subdivision of the State of Washington, ' hereafter called "County" and , hereinafter called"Contractor". The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below: ' 1. This Agreement is comprised of the Bidding Documents, Contract Documents, the Agreement, Plans and Specifications as described in the Contract Documents,Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement and modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. ' 2. The Contractor shall execute the entire work described in the Bidding and Contract Documents. 3. The date of commencement is the date the Contractor receives a signed copy of this Agreement by ' the Board of Commissioners, which shall be considered the notice to proceed. 4. The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire work no later than subject to adjustments provided for in the Contract Documents. 5. The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of dollars ($ ), subject to additions and ' deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 6. Progress Payments ' a. The Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor on account of the Contract Sum as provided for below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. The Contractor shall submit Application for Payment on AIA Document G702 forms not more than once per month or Contractor's own form with same information found on G702 Forms. c. The Contractor shall submit Application for Payment prior to the last day of each calendar month to the Owner or Owner's representative Architect. d. The Owner shall make progress payments within 15 calendar days of receipt of Application for ' Payment and certification that work has progressed satisfactorily. e. Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the ' entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner or Owner's Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner or Owner's Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for payment. f. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. g. Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: ❑ Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 005000 Contract sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less Retainage ' of five percent. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in the dispute may be included as provided in the General Conditions even ' though, the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order. ❑ Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction less Retainage of five percent. ' ❑ Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and ❑ Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Owner or Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate of Payment as provided in the General Conditions. 7. Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1)the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct non-conforming Work as provided in the General Conditions ' and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; and (2)a Final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect; such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Owner or Owner's representative Architect's final Certificate for Payment, punch list is completed and all close- ' out paperwork and documents have been submitted to the Owner including Department of Revenue clearance. 8. Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: , A. UBI Certification # (copy to be attached to Agreement). ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement on this_day of , 20 CONTRACTOR: OWNER: BOARD OF CLALLAM COUNTY COMMISSIONERS , (Name) (By) Mike Chapman, Chair ' (Its) ' Date: 20 ' ATTEST: Approved as to Form: Clerk of the Board, Trish Holden, CMC Prosecuting Attorney's Office END OF SECTION 005000 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor ' Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 ' GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Definitions ' 1.1.1 Contract Documents-consist of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions of the Contract, Supplemental Conditions, Bidding Documents, Bonds, Drawings and Specifications, Addenda, approved Alternates, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. 1.1.2 The term Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's ' obligations. 1.1.3 The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work. 1.1.4 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work and performance of related services. 1.1.5 The Project Manual is the volume assembled for the work, which includes the Bidding Documents including Call for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, and Contract Documents. ' 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent ' 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor, as provided in the Agreement. 1.2.2 Execution of the contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the ' site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution ' and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. ' In the event of a conflict or discrepancy in or between the Contract Documents, interpretation shall be governed as set forth in the following order, the first taking highest precedence: ' 1. Agreement(Owner-Contractor) 2. Addenda 3. National, State and local codes or ordinances 4. Supplementary Conditions 5. Other Conditions 6. General Conditions 7. Specifications (Divisions 01 through 33). Specifications shall govern over drawings and general III ' notes insofar as quality of materials, thickness or gauge of materials, finish of materials, composition of materials and quality of workmanship. 8. Drawings. Figure dimensions on drawings shall govern over nominal dimensions and over drawings without figured dimensions. Largest scale drawing covering any portion of the work shall govern over small-scale drawings of same portion of work, except as noted herein for figured Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract ' Section 006000 dimensions. Actual physical dimensions of specified stock items shall govern over dimensions , shown on drawings on work to receive such stock items. Custom items or modified stock items shall be fabricated to dimensions shown on drawings or to fit into other dimensioned work. ' Should conflict occur in or between drawings and specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated the more expensive way of doing work unless he has asked for and obtained written decision (4) Four working days before submission of bids as to which method or materials will be required. ' 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the ' extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized , meanings. 1.2.6 The apparent silence of the specifications or plans as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point shall be regarded as meaning that only the best ' general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of first quality are to be used. All interpretations of these specifications shall be made on the basis above stated. 1.3 Ownership of Documents 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner or Owner's Architect , are instruments of the Owner's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Owner shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to ' throughout the contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner' means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. ' 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys, utility locations, or other records that the Owner has presently on file or presently knows of to the contractor upon request. The Owner will not provide additional surveys, layouts or locations unless specifically stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. ' 2.1.3 The Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit. All other permits and fees for permits, shall be paid for by the Contractor. ' 2.1.4 The Owner shall have additional responsibilities enumerated herein. 2.1.5 If the Contractor fails to correct Work or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the ' Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. ' Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions , Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and ' with information furnished by the Owner and shall at once report to the Owner errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized (or should have ' recognized) such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Owner. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall assume ' appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Owner at once. 3.1.4 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. The Contractor shall have a Full-Time Superintendent,accepted by the Owner, dedicated specifically to this Project. The Contractor shall be responsible to fully inform his superintendent of all project activity including but not limited to progress, problems, decisions, changes and deficiencies as they happen. Should '. circumstances arise such that a new superintendent is assigned (subject to conditions as contained in the following subparagraph), the Contractor shall in addition to the foregoing, assure that the new superintendent has knowledge of all prior project history. Failure of a new superintendent to have complete knowledge of the project shall not relieve the contractor from compliance with the Contract or with any changes, decisions of directions occurring prior to the assignment of the new superintendent. Within Ten Calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to the ' Architect and Owner a chain-of-command organizational chart, which includes all supervisory personnel, including the Contractor's project manager and the superintendent that the Contractor intends to use on the Work. The superintendent shall remain on the Project whenever Subcontractors are present unless the job is closed down due to a legal holiday, a general strike, conditions beyond, the control of the Contractor, termination of the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, prior agreement with 1 Owner, or Final Completion is attained. The superintendent shall not be changed without the approval of the Owner, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. The superintendent can be employed on other projects during the course of the Work, only with the written approval of the Owner. The Owner' approval of change in superintendence shall not for any reason give rise to claim for change in time or contract amount. 3.1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 ' Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 3.1.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.1.7 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Should any Contractor employee or subcontractor be, or become objectionable to the Owner, said party will be immediately replaced by the Contractor upon written ' request from the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.1.8 The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials-and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required ' or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Owner the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.1.9 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the work or portions thereof ' provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.1.10 Other than the Building Permit, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. 3.1.11 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required bylaws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.1.12 If the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with codes, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification. 3.1.13 If the Contractor performs Work knowing or should have known it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ' ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. 3.1.14 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste , materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction , equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.1.15 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.1.16 The Contractor shall provide the Owner access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.1.17 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless, the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities i DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whole acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to ' negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph. 3.1.18 With respect to performance of this agreement and as to claims against the county, its elected and appointed officers, agents and employees, the Contractor expressly waives its immunity under Title 51 RCW, the Industrial Insurance Act, as now and hereafter amended, for injuries to its employees and agrees that the obligations to indemnify, defend and hold harmless provided in this agreement extend to any claim brought by or on behalf of any employee of the Contractor. This waiver is mutually negotiated by, the Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 The Owner's project manager shall be the administrator of the contract unless the Owner has agreement for architectural services. 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term"Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1)during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3)with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.1.4 The Architect will visit the site periodically(which includes pre-construction meetings and substantial completion review)at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive, or continuous on- site inspections to check observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.1.5 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 4.1.6 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractors Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts to the Owner who has final approval and authority. 4.1.7 The Architect,with Owner's approval,will have authority to refect Work, which does not conform to the Contract documents. Whenever the Architect, with Owners approval, considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect, with Owners approval, will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.1.8 The Architect will review and,with Owners approval, approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractors submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.1.9 The Architect,with the Owner's approval, will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the work as provided in Paragraph 7.1.4. 4.1.10 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will received and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 Definitions 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. 5.1.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Owner will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not, after due investigation, the Owner has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.1.3 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to which the Owner has made reasonable and timely objection. 5.1.4 If the Owner has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 5.1.5 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces. 6.1.3 If part of the Contractor's Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Owner apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1.1 Changes in the work may be accomplished after, execution of the Contract and without invalidating the Contract by Change Order. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order. 7.1.4 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Owner or Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: 1. a change in the Work, 2. the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and 3. the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 ARTICLE 8 TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 8.1.1 Contract time shall be as stated on the Notice of Call for Bids,from date of commencement established in the Agreement until final completion. 8.1.2 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.1.3 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall be not changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.1.4 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner, then the Contract time shall be extended by Change Order. 8.1.5 Should the Contractor fail to complete the Work within the Contract Time, the Owner will sustain damage. 8.1.6 Therefore, the parties agree that the Contractor shall pay the Owner, as liquidated damages and not as penalty, an amount as follows, which shall be considered to be the amount of the damage sustained by the Owner on account of the condition specified and shall continue to be paid until the condition specified is met. 8.1.7 It is agreed by the parties that time is of essence in this agreement and, if the date of final completion is delayed, the Owner will be damaged. The exact amount of the damage will be difficult to calculate, but will include such items as outside leases, loss of efficient function, and inconvenience to the public and to the Owner. It is agreed between the parties that the amount of damages will be $250.00 per calendar day from Final Completion date as designated on the Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. The Owner may deduct the sum of such liquidated damages from any moneys due or that may become due the Contractor; or if such moneys are insufficient, the Contractor or his Surety or Sureties shall pay the difference. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.1.2 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner or Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner or Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities 1 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 9.1.3 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or Architect, if one is used, an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies or requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting Retainage if provided for elsewhere-in the Contract Documents. 9.1.4 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the work which have been properly authorized by Change Orders. 9.1.5 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.1.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. 9.1.7 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.1.8 The Owner shall determine the payment amount to be made to the Contractor. 9.1.9 At the time each month stipulated in the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor an amount equal to ninety-five percent(95%) of the value of labor and material incorporated in the work, all as approved by the Architect in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents; such amount paid to the Contractor shall be less the total of all previous payments and deductions provided for in the Contract Documents. The five percent(5%)withheld shall be Retainage, which shall be paid as provided hereinafter. The percentage of contract retained shall be five percent(5%) pursuant to RCW Chapter 60.28, as amended. Thirty days after final acceptance of the completed work, the balance due will be paid, provided, a. The work be fully completed. b. Certification has been received by the Owner from the State Department of Labor and Industries, as to payment of prevailing wages, in conformance with laws. c. Certification has been received by the Owner from the State Department of Revenue that all taxes have been paid, no tax lien may exist, and d. The Contractor warrants to the Owner all claims by materialmen and workmen, if any, for unpaid charges against the work have been satisfied, and e. To hold the Owner harmless from all liens on the completed work. In the event these provisions are not met, the Owner may pay a percentage of the Retainage, holding back that quantity of money for materialmen and laborer's liens, tax liens, cost and attorney's fees to defray the cost of foreclosing all other liens, costs, and Architect's fee to defray cost of additional Construction Administration services. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 After the award of a Contract for public improvement or work for which retained percentages are required to be reserved under the provisions of RCW 60.28.010. Owner shall require the Contractor to exercise in writing, one of the options listed in RCW 60.20.010. Retained amounts shall be paid into an escrow account, if requested, in a financial institution chosen by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, the interest earnings from which shall accrue to the benefit of the Contractor. 9.1.10 Final payment will not be made by the Owner until all contract conditions and requirements have been fulfilled and all forms and certificates are received in full. 9.1.11 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner or Architect will promptly make such inspection, and when Owner and Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising full-time, all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if, in fact, the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)and has not been rendered harmless. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or PCB, or when it has been rendered harmless by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. 10.1.3 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable I� protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; 2. the work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, and 3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.1.4 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.1.5 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.1.6 When use or storage of explosive or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 10.1.7 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations. 10.1.8 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.1.9 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. 10.1.10 The Contractor agrees to comply with Chapter 49.18 RCW providing that no laborer, workman, or mechanic in the employ of the Contractor, Subcontractor, or other person doing or contracting to do the work or any part of the work contemplated by the Contract, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight(8) hours in any one calendar day, provided that, in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases shall not be less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight(8) hours' service. Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, or Sunday or legal holidays shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner. Contractor further agrees the said Contract is terminable in case the Contractor shall violate the provisions of such act. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE & BONDS 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which.the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or(2) by another person; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of ' tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; 6. claims for damages-because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and 7. claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 11.1.2 The Contractor shall name the Owner, the Architect, their consultants, and their officers, agents, and employees, as additional insured on the insurance policies, except the workers' or workmen's compensation policy. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner and Architect the list of names to appear on the insurance policies. 11.1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law: 1. Workers' Compensation; a. State: Statutory b. Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoremen, harbor Work, Work at or outside U.S. Boundaries): Statutory c. Employer's Liability: $1,000,000.00 d. Benefits Required by Union labor contracts: as applicable e. Include all-states endorsement 2. Comprehensive General Liability(Including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective, Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a. Bodily Injury: -$1,000,000.00 Single Limit Per Occurrence -Full Contract Amount Aggregate, Products and Completed Operations b. Property Damage: Course of Construction Insurance - Full Contract Amount Each Occurrence - Full Contract Amount Aggregate c. Products and Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained until 30 days after final completion d. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: Vandalism, Fire, Explosion, Collapse, and Underground e. Contractual Liability: 1. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 2. Property Damage: -Full Contract Amount Each Occurrence - Full Contract Amount Aggregate f. Personal Injury with Employment Exclusion Deleted: -$1,000,000.00 Aggregate 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability(Owned, Non-owned, Hired): a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000.00 Each Person $1,000,000.00 Each Occurrence b. Property Damage: $100,000.00 Each Occurrence 4. If possible, all of the above insurance coverage shall be carried with the same insurance company. 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner and the Architect prior to commencement of the work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage's afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor, and the Owner's insurer. Certificates shall be furnished in duplicate and stipulate all coverage required, and the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and the Architect copies of all endorsements that area subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. -� Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 ' 11.1.5 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Contract sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made. 11.1.6 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. ' 11.1.7 The Contractor shall secure and pay for performance and payment bonds issued by a bonding company, licensed to transact business in the locality of the-project, on a Bond Form executed in pursuance to Chapter 39.08 Revised Code of Washington. The Bond Form must comply with all requirements of the Owner's attorney. The surety bond shall be in the following penal sums: • Performance Bond 100% of agreement sum, including Washington State Sales Tax • Labor and Material 100%of agreement sum, including Washington State Sales Tax • Four copies of Bond Certification required. 11.1.8 The Contract Bond or an equivalent Maintenance Bond shall continue in for force until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. 11.1.9 The Contractor guarantees the excellence of both workmanship and material, and the payment of all obligations incurred until the Work is finally accepted and for(30)days thereafter, and until the provisions of the Contract Documents are fulfilled. 11.1.10 For the projects under$25,000.00 Contractor may agree to a 50% Retainage fund in lieu of providing a performance bond. The Retainage fund to be held by the County until work is complete, all paperwork is turned in and state releases signed and returned to County. ARTICLE 12 WARRANTY 12.1.1 The Contractor shall warranty all labor, materials and work performed for a period of 1 year from date of final completion. ARTICLE 13 LAW, SUCCESSORS,TESTS 13.1.1 The contract shall be governed bylaw of the place where project is located. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 13.1.2 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such as assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.1.3 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.1.4 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty-afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except a may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.1.5 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.1.6 If the Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owner may observe such procedures. 13.1.7 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures. 13.1.8 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION 14.1.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: 1. refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; 2. fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 3. disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations, or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or 4. otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. i 1 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 ARTICLE 15 PREVAILING WAGES 15.1.1 REQUIRED: CONTRACTOR TO FILE STATEMENT OF INTENT TO PAY PREVAILING WAGES AND AFFIDAVIT OF WAGES PAID. The prevailing rate of wage to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 39.12 RCW, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State of Washington. The prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities where this Contract will be performed shall be determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, and are, by reference, made a part of this contract as though fully set forth herein. Current prevailing wage data is furnished by the Industrial Statistician. 15.1.2 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: The Contractor, on or before the date of commencement of work, shall complete, file and pay for a statement under oath with the Owner and with the Director of Labor and Industries certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workmen or mechanics employed upon the work by the Contractor or Subcontractor which shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wage. (State Form LI 700-29), State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages on Public Contract"form. Such statement and any subsequent statements shall be filed in accordance with the practices and procedures required by the Department of Labor and Industries. Therefore, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with this form and all its requirements. The Owner will not distribute any payments until all required certified copies of such forms are received. 15.1.3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to require all his Subcontractors to complete and pay for "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages"forms, submit these documents to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification and forward certified copies to the Owner as proof that the prevailing wage requirements of RCW 39.12.040 have been satisfied. Additional forms may be obtained from the Department of Labor and Industries, Industrial Relations Division, General Administration Building, Olympia, Washington 98504, and from all 15 service locations of the Department of Labor and Industries. 15.1.4 Each voucher claim submitted by a Contractor for payment on a project estimate shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre-filed statement or statements of intent on file with the Department of Labor and Industrial Statistician. 15.1.5 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall further certify that: a. He has not employed or retained any company or person (other than a full-time bona fide employee working solely for the offer or to solicit or receive this Contract and b. He has not paid or agreed to pay any company or person (other than a full-time bona fide employee working solely for the offer or) any fee, commission, percentage or brokerage fee contingent upon or resulting from the award of this Contract; and C. He has not been asked or otherwise coerced, either expressed or implied, into contributing funds, for any purpose as a condition to doing business with the Owner; and d. He agrees to furnish information relating to items 1,2 and 3 as requested by the contracting officer. 15.1.6 It is further agreed that in case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing wages for the work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties involved, the matter shall be Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State, and his decision therein shall be final, binding and conclusive on all parties involved in the dispute. 15.1.7 Upon completion of a Public Works Project, the Contractor, for himself and on behalf of all Subcontractors, shall file"Affidavit of Wages Paid"forms. Forms properly executed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be submitted with proper payment to: Department of Labor and Industries, Industrial Insurance Division, Underwriting Section, General Administration Building, Olympia, WA 98504. Each "Affidavit of Wages" must be certified by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries before it is submitted to the Owner. Copies of all required statements must be on file with the Owner before the retained percentage is released. 15.1.8 Upon completion of a Public Works project, the Contractor shall file a"Release for the Protection of Property Owner and General Contractor" form (LI 206-83 release 1-67)with the Department of Labor and Industries. The Owner will not disburse final payment or the Retainage to the Contractor until a release has been issued by the Department of Labor and Industries. Contractor shall pay for all costs of obtaining and filing all Labor and Industries forms. ARTICLE 16 OFFSHORE ITEMS 16.1.1 In compliance with RCW 39.25, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner a certified statement setting forth the nature and source to Offshore items in excess of$2,500 which have been utilized under each prime contract in the performance of the work. "Offshore Items"are those items procured from sources beyond the territorial boundaries of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. This certified statement is mandatory and shall be received before final payment is made on the contract. ARTICLE 17 PREVENTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND PRESERVATION OF PUBLIC NATURAL RESOURCES 17.1.1 Pursuant to Chapter 62, Laws of 1973, 1 st Ex. Session, those provisions of federal, state and local statutes, ordinances, and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources that affect, or are affected by, the herein described project are, to the extent they are reasonably obtainable, as follows: RCW 43.21.030; RCW 90.58.140; RCW 90.58.320; and RCW 70.94.152. Conform with the provisions thereof. ARTICLE 18 DISCRIMINATION 18.1.1 The Contractor, by entering this contract, agrees that Discrimination in all phases of employment is prohibited by Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Presidential Executive Order 11375, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination, Chapter 49.60 RCW, and by Gubernatorial Executive Orders 66-1 and 70-01, among other laws and regulations. 18.1.2 During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory or mental handicap, nor shall the Contractor commit any of the other unfair practices defined in RCW 79.60, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 006000 2. The Contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by on without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability. ' 3. The Contractor will send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under this contract and RCW 49.60, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. 4. The Contractor will permit access to its books, records and accounts, and to its premises by the Owner or the Washington State Human Rights Commission for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with these specifications. 5. The Contractor will include the provisions of clauses, .1 through .4 above in every Subcontract or purchase order, so that such provisions will be upon each Subcontractor or vendor. 1 ARTICLE 19 COUNTY/CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP 19.1.1 In the event that either the state or federal government determines that an employer-employee relationship exists, rather than an independent contractor relationship, such that Clallam County is deemed responsible for federal withholding, social security contributions and the like, the Contractor agrees to reimburse Clallam County for any payments made or required to be made by Clallam County. 1 Should any payments be due to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement, the Contractor agrees that reimbursement may be made by deducting from such future payments a pro rata share of the amount to be reimbursed based upon the following formula: Total amount to be reimbursed = Deduction from payment Number of payments remaining. Notwithstanding a determination by the state or federal government that employer-employee relationship exists, the Contractor, its officers, employees and agents, shall not be entitled to any benefits which Clallam County provides to its employees, including, but not limited to, vacation and medical benefits. 19.1.2 The status of the Contractor hereunder is that of an independent contractor and the Contractor shall not be construed to be an employee of Clallam County. As an independent contractor, the Contractor is not entitled to any benefits available to employees of Clallam County and the Contractor is responsible for withholding any moneys required to be withheld from the Contractor's employees pursuant to local, state, or federal law including, but not limited to, workers compensation, social security, and taxes. END OF SECTION 006000 i Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Conditions Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities i DIVISION ZERO List of Drawings Section 008600 LIST OF DRAWINGS SHEET NUMBER SHEET CONTENTS AO-1 COVER SHEET A2-1 DEMOLITION PLANS A2-2 FLOOR & CEILING PLANS A9-1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS / DETAILS A9-2 DETAILS END OF SECTION 008600 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-List of Drawings Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ONE—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Requirements Section 010010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. SUMMARY OF WORK A. Contract Description: 1. Work includes, but is not limited to—see Section 011000—"SUMMARY"for Description. ' B. The Contractor is responsible for verifying all systems, assemblies, and details of construction prepared by the Owner as being appropriate to and within the standard practices of the building trades involved. The Contractor and all of his subcontractors and sub-subcontractors shall have reviewed all documents thoroughly and shall report all discrepancies, irregularities, and items that differ from standard practices during the bidding phase. The Contractor shall also be responsible to ensure proper coordination between all trades and all the corresponding documentation directing those trades. The Contractor shall also be responsible for confirmation of all manufacturers' instructions and special requirements of the use and application of their products. 2. WORK NOT IN CONTRACT A. 'NIC' (Not in Contract) items are as follows: 1. As noted in Drawings, if any. 3. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. The Contractor shall have access only to the areas where the new work is to be executed. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for staging, construction, and parking during construction, which will be limited to the area of Work. Work times and dates shall be scheduled and approved by the Owner prior to start of work. B. Contractor shall not access the upper level of facility for any reason. If access is required it must first be approved by Owner a minimum of three (3) days in advance. 4. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall execute all cutting and patching of existing conditions with the same skilled workmen, with the same material supplies, and with the same equipment as required for new work of the same type. 1. The cut and patched areas shall be left so that when the work of this Project is completed, all evidence of the cutting and patching is removed. 2. Texture, finish and color of new or patched areas shall match that of the existing/adjacent construction. 5. UNIT PRICING A. Provide unit pricing for the following items: 1. See Section 012200—"UNIT PRICES". Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Requirements Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities Requirements DIVISION ONE—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Re Q Section 010010 6. ALTERNATES A. None. 7. COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of specification to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements with a minimum of public service disruption. B. Verify utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of electrical work, which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for conduit and wiring as closely as practicable. D. In finished areas, conceal pipes and wiring within the construction. 8. EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Submission of Bid means acceptance of existing conditions. 9. PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 10. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. See Section 013300—"SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES". B. Submittal form to identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; and pertinent Contract Document references. C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents, prior to submitting the submittal for review by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect. D. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations, which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. E. Revise and submit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal. 11. QUALITY ASSURANCE-CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. See Section 014000—"QUALITY REQUIREMENTS". Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Requirements Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ONE—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Requirements Section 010010 B. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality, or when no level of quality is specified, perform Work as would be standard for a"custom" installation. C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 12. TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' tolerances. 13. REFERENCES ' A. See Section 014200—"REFERENCES". B. Conform to reference standards applicable for each system, product, or assembly as commonly applied to each trade or discipline for this type of work and level of quality specified or implied, by date of issue current as of date of Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standard conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. 14. ELECTRICITY A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Contractor shall be responsible for Electrical Permit and inspections as required. 15. LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. 16. WATER A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". 17. SANITARY FACILITIES A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Building facilities may not be used by Contractor. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Requirements Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ONE—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Requirements Section 010010 18. ENCLOSURES A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of adjacent existing conditions, and barriers to protect the adjacent room from construction dust and fumes. Provide adequate fencing to secure site from public users. 19. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. 20. SECURITY A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 21. PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. See Section 015000—"TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS". B. Collect and maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain construction area in a clean and orderly condition. Contractor responsible for all costs involved in waste removal. 22. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A. See Section 017700—"CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES". ' B. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities and materials, prior to Final Completion review. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 23. PRODUCTS A. See Section 016000—"PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS". B. Products: means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components specifically identified for reuse. C. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically identified or allowed by the Contract Documents. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Requirements Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities DIVISION ONE—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Requirements Section 010010 D. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced and/or added in addition to existing components, e.g. lighting, switches, receptacles, etc. 24. TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. f25. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. See Section 017700—"CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES". IB. Submit written certification the Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with the General Conditions and the Contract Documents and ready for Owner inspection. C: Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum/Price previous payments, and amount remaining due. D. Complete and submit all required documentation, covered in this Project Manual, and the drawings. 26. FINAL CLEANING A. See Section 017700—"CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES". B. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. C. Thoroughly clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. D. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 27. ADJUSTING A. See Section 017700—"CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES". 1 B. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 28. WARRANTIES A. See Section 01-7700—"CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES". B. Provide duplicate notarized copies. C. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. END OF SECTION 010010 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel June 2016 Division 00-General Requirements Clallam County Parks,Fair&Facilities I CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 011000-SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. , 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. j 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION ' A. Project Identification: Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel, No. 621606TS. 1. Project Location: 111 East Third St., Port Angeles, Washington 98362. B. Owner: Clallam County, 223 East 4th Street, Port Angeles, Washington. 1. Owner's Representative: Joel G. Winborn, Director Clallam County Parks, Fair & Facilities, Telephone: 360.417.2429, Fax: 360.417.2395. C. Architect: Michael Beaman, President Beaman Architecture, Ltd, Telephone: 503.236.3300. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Tenant Improvements to an existing County-Owned building. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. , SUMMARY 011000- 1 tCLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. 1 Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's ' operations. 1 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise agreed upon with Owner. C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. F. Employee Identification: Owner will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. SUMMARY 011000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of , Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. , 1.S SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS ' A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied ' where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. ' B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are , described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of , the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) 1 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL UNIT PRICES SECTION 012200- C S ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and ' handling Change Orders. 2. Section 014000"Quality Requirements"for general testing and inspecting requirements. I1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. I B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. ' C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. ' D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. UNIT PRICES 012200- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) , PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price 1: Reuse of Owner-Accepted existing solid core wood doors in lieu of base bid new solid core wood doors. ' 1. Description: Existing solid core wood doors are to be removed and salvaged for reuse. Contractor is to inspect removed wood doors with Owner present and decide which and how many existing doors are acceptable for inclusion in the Project, according to Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors". Unit Price is to include refinishing of door, prepping for hardware, coordination and reinstallation. 2. Unit of Measurement: Per installed door. END OF SECTION 012200 1 UNIT PRICES 012200-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1 PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 1 Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. ' 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, ' as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be ' provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 1 C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work ' specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and ' installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and , addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. ' i. Detailed comparison of Contractors construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's ' letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently ' become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or ' documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. ' b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved ' substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for ' change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: ' a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. ' C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 1 h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 20 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the ' following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 r Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy a. Requested substitution offers 9 9Y q conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. ' b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce I indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. ' SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing ' Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: ' 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not ' involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project Manual. ' 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed ' changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the 1 Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.613, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail'or forms acceptable to Architect. ' CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the t Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the , Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed ' change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request(Proposal),"with attachments CSI Form 13.613, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail"or form acceptable to Architect. ' 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on AIA Document G714. ' Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also , designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. ' B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary ' to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) ' END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2 BEAMAN ARCHITECTURE LTD 1634 SE 54TH AVENUE PORTLAND,OR 97215 503.236.3300 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS PROJECT: Clallam County 3rd Street Building NO.: Level 2 Remodel ' CONTRACTOR: TBD DATE: CONTRACT: GENERAL BEAMAN JOB NO.: 16101 ' REFERENCE: City of Port Angeles Revision DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED: ASI NO.#-# ' ASI NO.#-# ' ■ Referenced Drawings: X#-# ■ Attached Drawings: X#-# If above work results in a change in cost or time to the Contract, advise Architect within 21 calendar days. Include a complete, and itemized breakdown of costs for change. COPIES TO: ■ OWNER ..............................Joel Winborn—Clallam County ■ CONTRACTOR ...................TBD ' ❑ CITY ....................................City of Port Angeles 1 Michael Beaman, Architect President, Beaman Architecture, Ltd. 1 BEAMAN ARCHITECTURE, LTD. , A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 1634 SE 54th Avenue PORTLAND,OR 97215 503 236 3300 ' PROJECT: Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 2 Remodel NO.: CONTRACTOR: TBD DATE: DATE OF CONTRACT: (NTP) Project No.: 621606TS ' When approval has been obtained from all parties to the Contract and governing agencies,you are authorized to make the following changes without changing the terms of the Contract,except as herein stipulated and agreed. , DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED: Item Item Reference Item Description Cost , No. 1 COP No.# TOTAL ' REASON FOR CHANGE: REQUESTED BY: The Contractor agrees to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work required to complete the above- ' described change in accordance with the requirements for similar work covered by the Contract, except as otherwise stipulated herein,for the following consideration(not including Washington State Sales Tax): 1 Original Contract: $ Previous Additions: Previous Deductions: This Change Order: Contract to Date: $ ' The Notice to Proceed date is The Contract Completion date for substantial completion is The Contract Completion date for final completion is , By reason of this modification the contract completion date is unchanged. APPROVED: Architect Date General Contractor Date ' Owner Date Board of County Commissioners Office Date ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for ' handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's ' Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line-items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: ' a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than time indicated in Section 002000. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: ' a. Project name and location. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900- 1 i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL b. Name of Architect. ' C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. , e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the ' following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. , b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. , f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. ' 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. , 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. , 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. ' 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. , Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2 ' 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent ' with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application ' for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by ' Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for ' Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. ' 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. ' 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project ' acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. ' 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous ' Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. C. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and ' remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of ' lien and similar attachments if required. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate , information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's , liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after ' deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. , 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application that is ' lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or ' coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. , 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule(preliminary if not final). 4. Products list(preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractors staff assignments. 7. List of Contractors principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. , 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. ' 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. ' I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for , portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. , 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final , Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. ' 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. , 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractors Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." ' PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) ' PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) IEND OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-5 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT A A DOCUMENT G702 (Instructions on rcverse side) I:AGti UNE or PAGE'S 1"C:) OWNER: PROJECT- r1Pi'I..LC:AI'ION WY: Distribution ur; PERIOD 'r(:): ❑ OWNER PRC)iI3("r N(:)S.: ❑ARC Il1'I'l(..L. ❑ (,ONT"RAC OR FROM CONTRACTOR: ViA ARCHITECT. CONTRAC'T' 1)Arli: ❑ ❑ (:a)MrRACr FOR: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT The unde.rsigncd Ccxtttactar, certifies that to the Hest ol•Ihe Contractor's knowledge:,intar- oration and belle.f the Work cove,re d.by this Application for Payment has been completed Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. in accordance with the ContractDocuments, that all amounts have been paid by the (::unrinuation Sheet, AiA Document (.3,703, is attached. Contractor for Work for which l:rcvio us Certificates for Payment were issued and pay- ment's receivcxd fYC>n1 ltle.6)SY11e1",.and that,current payment shown herein is now Clue i. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM. . . . .. . . . CIONTRAC'['OR: 2. Net change by Change Orders 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 t Z). . . . _ . . .S ,_ 13y: Gate: 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE. . . . . . State: uf. (Column G cin G703) county of: 5. RETAINAGE: Subscribed,and sworn to taefore a. % of Cotmpicted Work me this day of (Columns D + E on 6.;7(13) b. '% of Stored Material ff (Column .F on 6703) Notary Public:: 'legal Retainage (Linc 5a -N 51-) or tYly (.t5mtttission ex}7ire;5: -Kral in 6.01117111 I of G703) . . . . . . . S Ci. TOTAL EARNED LESS.RETAINAGE. . . ._;, . .'.; ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT (Line -I less Line 5 'Ibt:ai) LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT Ill.cc(lydance.with the Crnuractl:)ocuments,based cm un site:observations and the data (Line (i Crum )riot Certificate) h comprising this application, the; Architeu cert.ifics I.()the:Owner that lo the best of III( Architect's knowledge,informad011 and belief clic:Work has progressed as indicated,the S. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE . . -. duality ul'the Work is in, incl the Contractor ------ is entitled to payment of the. AMOUNT CIiRTIFIED. 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE (Linc 3 less Line Ci) S. AMOUNT CERTIFIED , ... . . . . . . . ...$_�� _ (Attach esJ)larralion if amount cerrti(iced di%fctrc from The amount at)/)lled Jbr. initial (a1ANGi: ORDER :SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS rill fikure>s on Ibis .11)1)licevion orad on lbe> C<nttinuation Sheet that are chmiged to 'total changes approved in cwifc))-m to the amount cerly'ted.) previous months by Owner ARCHITEC.T. '10tal approved this Nlontht By: M.._ -- T(Y Al-S This C ei uficatc is not negodabic. The A1MOUN 1 (.ER'1'IFltiD is payable only to the.(:oil. y Ch nge �- tractor f pm .named herein. issuance, payment and acceptance of are without b b !)oder prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract: AIA DOCUMENT GM2 •APPLIC.NNON AND(r-,.im cxrii izok PAY iI?N•I`• 092 EDITION •AiA` (ti)1992 • THF.AMERICAN IN5'IJit TE C;H`ARCIHTE(A", 1715 NEW PUNK AVTN-1;r•:. N W. WASHINGTON, D.C; 200k1Ci 5:_'9_' • WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. G702-1992 -CAUdiblinyoll SIMuse iftinal iMcunafthichiftis casprintifted.Piftinal�s thtolges liWt beg=red t occi*n dt nts e�oduaft CONTINUATION SHEET Air DOCUMEN71" 6703 (Instructions on reverse side) PACE OF PAGES ATA .Document G-702, APPLICATION AND C E10 FICATE F'OR PAYMENT, - APPLICAI10N NO.: containing Contractor's signed Certification, is attached. APPLICATIC)N DXFE: In tabulations tvlow, atnotints are stated to the nearest dollar. PERIOD TO: Use COICl11111 I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. ARCHITECTS S PROD C"1'NO.: WORK.COMPLETED MAl'ERIALS TOTAL BALANCE PR:ESL NTIN COMPLETED. Rl TAINAG ITEilvl SCHEDULE)) }'R(),tit P121;V1C)LI:S ST()BI 1,) AND Sl()REI:) " I'(') (11 VARIABLE) NO, [)LSC:I21P"[ION (7F V�'L)HCC VALUE APPLICA7HON THIS PFIRIOD 1,0 f.)ATE (-) FINISH (D + E) D Olt E) (U+E rF7 AIA DOCUMENT 0703•CONTINUNI'ION.SHEET POWG702 +'1992 Er)i,noW AIA' • it')19)2'• THE'AWRICAN INSfITM'h OF ARCHI EC."IS,'"1'735 NEW,YORK nvt:Nt�t,N ver,AASHINGT()N,D.0 200cKr5292•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. G703-1992 CAUTION:You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed In red.An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 013100- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary , Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: ' 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. , 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- ' engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700"Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or , clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a ' special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying ' products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Before starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel , assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, ' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES ' A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper ' installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before ' or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees ' at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of ' the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractors construction schedule. ' 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. ' 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. ' 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than ' one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to ' indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2 i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination. drawings. , Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. , b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. ' C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural and other applicable systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. , e. Show location and size of access doors required For access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. ' g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed ' resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) ' A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an IRFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to the Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. ' 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or ' interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. ' 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. ' 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the ' Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe ' items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected , materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to the Architect. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. ' Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m.will be considered as received the following working day. ' 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. ' C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. ' e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600"Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or ' the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. ' E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain-, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Include in software log not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. ' F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. ' 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. ' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is ' required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. , 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within three days of the meeting. ' B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a pre-construction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than seven days ' after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner and Architect; Contractor and its ' superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. ' 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. ' C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. ' f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. ' j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. I. Preparation of record documents. ' M. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. P. Owner's occupancy requirements. ' q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Parking availability. S. Office, work, and storage areas. ' t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. U. First aid. V. Security. W. Progress cleaning. ' 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. ' 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. ' 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. ' All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-5 , tCLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL t3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 1 a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind t schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. ' b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. ' 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. ' 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS-(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) ' END OF SECTION 013100 ' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary , Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: ' 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. ' 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Special reports. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300"Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. , 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, ' and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project i where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. ' C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. ' E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. ' 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. ' 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. ' 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. ' B. Startup construction schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule ' for entire construction period. D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. ' E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. F. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed, to date of ' Substantial Completion and final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in ' Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for , Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 4. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. ' E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 1. Use Microsoft Project, for Windows XP operating system. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash ' requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. ' 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 15 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. ' 2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. �. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Installation. ' g. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.. h. Punch list and final completion. i. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of ' materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project ' site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. L B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at ' Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know ' schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedulbs to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as"action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as"informational submittals." C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET '. BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead- time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. �. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action, informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2000, Microsoft XP operating system. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal, with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow seven days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed, must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Re-submittal Review: Allow seven days for review of each re-submittal. D. Paper Submittals: Not allowed. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1 a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Re- submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. �i d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. I. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1 M. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be, signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base 1 Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 22 by 34 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. : a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract _Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900"Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000"Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700"Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7 N D CLALLAM COUNTY 3R STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Pre-construction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply-with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-8 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL f C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: ❑ NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED ❑ IMPLEMENT EXCEPTIONS NOTED ❑ REVISE AND RESUBMIT ❑ REJECTED tThis conditional review is limited in scope and not detailed and is only for conformance with design concept and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirming quantities, verifying dimensions, selecting fabrication procedures, construction techniques, coordinating and safely performing the Work. The Architect has not reviewed and is not responsible for substitutions to or deviations from the Contract Documents not clearly noted by the Contractor and specifically accepted by the Architect in writing or by the Architect's issuance of a Field Order. By: Date: BEAMAN ARCHITECTURE,LTD. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned for re-submittal without review. E. Submittals not required, by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-9 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL �1 SECTION 014000-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. , 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for, Contractor to provide quality assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction, will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation ' of the Work and for completed Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1 F. Installer/Applicator/Erector. Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. G. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality control activities and responsibilities. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within seven days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to pre-construction conference. Submit in format ' acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. C. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection. D. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. 1 E. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. , 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering- services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. E. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities that are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy ' qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to the NIST National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work ' that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are ' Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. ' 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. ' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance ' and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. F. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party j involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG t, A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: ' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-5 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300"Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 1 responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 �1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 014200- REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,""selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as"directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,""scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having ' jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent , requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES 014200- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. ' 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909)472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888)422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800)423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562)699-0543 C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications ' or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. COE Army Corps of Engineers (202)761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800)638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202)482-2000 ' www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215)697-6257 ' http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 ' www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202)272-0167 www.epa.gov REFERENCES 014200-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 l www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888)225-5322 ' www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888)463-6332 ' www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800)488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202)708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510)4864000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202)693-1999 PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202)690-7694 http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/ , RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) ' SD State Department (202)647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://guiliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 ' www.usda.gov USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800)227-8772 ' www.usp.org USPS Postal Service (202)268-2000 ' www.usps.com D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and ' regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. REFERENCES 014200-3 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) (202)272-0080 ' Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.htmi DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215)697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dia.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215)697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/ Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dia.mil Available from General Services Administration (202)619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202)289-7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb 1 FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) ' MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215)697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dia.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202)272-0080 www.access-board.gov ' E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. REFERENCES 014200-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL CBHF State of Califomia, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800)952-5210 ' Furnishings and Thermal Insulation www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041 ' CCR Califomia Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Services (916)445-4171 ' www.dhcs.ca.gov CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service ' Forest Resource Development (979)458-6606 hftp://txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) , END OF SECTION 014200 , REFERENCES 014200- 5 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000"Summary"for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned 1 responsibilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS , A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD ' line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD comer and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame- ' spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. ' B. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference , with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. , 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities , are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. , TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. ' 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- containment devices. 2. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter- equipped vacuum equipment. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction ' from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. ' F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. H. Telephone Service: Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio 1 for Project use. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. ' B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. C. Temporary Signs: Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. ' D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300"Execution." 1 E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. ' 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"and not temporary facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided they are ' cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore .damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION ' A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except-those indicated to be, removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible ' air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000"Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit , or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Storm-water Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm-water from heavy rains. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar ' violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having , jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. , Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated on Drawings. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing at affected building , entries. I. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration ' and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-4 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant- treated plywood. a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security I locks where openings are required. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. ' 1. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. ' 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL ' A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may ' Substantial Completion. p ry, have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. ' 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary-facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during ' construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." ' END OF SECTION 015000 ' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 016000- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500"Substitution Procedures"for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200"References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or ' taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. , 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal , process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. ' B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, ' dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. ' Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. , PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products"Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or ' documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within seven days, of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300"Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a 1 comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if ' previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. ' 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. ' 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: ' 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather- tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 5. Comply with product manufacturers' written instructions for temperature, humidity, ' ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. , 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES ' A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other , warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a , particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. , 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. , C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700"Closeout Procedures." PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES ' A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, ' are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items ' needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. , 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. ' 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or ' "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3 ' 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the ' named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: ' a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that, complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both,available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed ' product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product. ' 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractors convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturers product. ' 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the ' other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other ' specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. ' D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturers product line that includes both standard and premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS , A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable , product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract ' Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. , 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. ' 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. ' PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-5 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 017300-EXECUTION 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the ' Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Protection of installed construction. 5. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000"Summary"for limits on use of Project site. ' 2. Section 017700"Closeout Procedures"for final cleaning. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan, describing procedures at least seven days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: ' 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform ' patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. ' EXECUTION 017300- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during ' interruption of permanent services and systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of ' construction elements. 1. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components ' in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in , reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual ' evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. ' B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. , PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. ' B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent ' possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when , installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities and construction indicated as , existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the ' Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. ' EXECUTION 017300-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Examine roughing-in. for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are ' to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. ' C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.. ' 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. ' 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. ' 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. ' B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. ' Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. ' EXECUTION 017300-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or ' loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction , items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce.harmful noise levels. ' G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that , adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate , size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. , 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, , arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered ' hazardous. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. ' Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their , original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. ' C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. t D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching. E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or , adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. EXECUTION 017300 -4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. ' 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent ' entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 4. Proceed with patching-after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. ' a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,-oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. ' 3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce 1 requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and ' debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. ' Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. ' 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for ' proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. ' 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. EXECUTION 017300-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written ' instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed ' surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ' G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." ' H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from , damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure , operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the ' construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION ' A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300-6 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, ' but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300"Execution"for progress cleaning of Project site. ' 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section 017839'Project Record Documents"for submitting record Drawings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. ' C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. ' 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. ' 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES ' A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and ' corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of seven days ' prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction ' permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project ' record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, ' workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of ' maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. , 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of seven days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. , 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough. , 3. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,- construction tools, and similar elements. 4. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 5. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual ' defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a ' minimum of seven days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or ' additional items identified by Architect that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections ' as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final ' completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment ' Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch -list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been ' completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of seven days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled ' requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. ' 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by ' construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. ' 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: ' a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. ' e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1 ' CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, ' thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. ' 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. ' 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty ' and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide book marked table of contents at beginning of document. B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 FINAL CLEANING , A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. ' B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and , maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification ' of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and , other foreign substances. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. ' C. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. d. Clean affected exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original ' condition. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. ' g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. ' i. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. ' B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly ' adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified ' condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. ' 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for ' new fixtures. ' END OF SECTION 017700 1 ' CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: ' 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Product maintenance manuals. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation , and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual , Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. , 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions ' and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: ' 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable ' item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least seven days before commencing closeout. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least seven days before commencing closeout. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within seven days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing closeout. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY t A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: ' 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. ' 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. ' D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. !. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ' ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for ' each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Title Page: Include the following information: ' 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to ' accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. ' E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. ' 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. ' 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable book marking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite book-marked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. ' F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty,, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders in thickness y necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- ' reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of ' contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. r Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 1 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS 1 A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Precautions against improper use. 8. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described-below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and ' arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: , 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and , conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include-procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. �. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to operation and maintenance manuals. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700"Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity that obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic. documentation. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Locations of concealed internal utilities. f. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive. g. Changes made following Architect's written orders. h. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. i. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. j. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, Architect will prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-2 r CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 024119-SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: , 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. IN 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119- 1 r CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. ,. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. A. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. C. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction photographs and templates. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, walks and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are ' exposed during selective demolition operations. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. SELECTIVE STRUCU T RE DEMOLITION 024119- 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. Do not use cutting torches. 4. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 061053-MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency , is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL r2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: I 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber ' of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative-treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME 818.6.1. 1 E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring ' backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. u D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. F. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL tB. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 064116- PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative r laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116- 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL T1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products ' similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION 1 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Face frame. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Reveal overlay. E. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Panolam Industries International. Inc. C. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. H. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. ' 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. 1 J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations, in Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic Laminate Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1 made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with . thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. 1 B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semi-concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, 803141. E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, 804013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-over-travel-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD-100. 3. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD- 200. G. Door Locks: Best 5L Series; all doors in File/Work Room 221, H. Drawer Locks: Best 5L Series; all drawers in File/Work Room 221. I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA Al 56.16, L03011. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. , K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Resorcinol. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1 B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Owner seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams ' to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. ' E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. ' C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. 3.4 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS COLOR SCHEDULE A. Plastic Laminate PLAM-#: Where this designation is indicated, provide plastic laminate complying with the following type/color/finish numbers: 1. PLAM-1: Nevamar#FS5001 T, "Alpine Fissure", Textured. 2. PLAM-2: Nevamar#S6001T, "Black", Textured END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 079200-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. (At interior plumbing fixtures or as noted) , 2. Urethane joint sealants. (At exterior locations) 3. Latex joint sealants. (At interior locations at gypsum board or as noted) B. Related Sections: ' 1. Section 088000"Glazing"for glazing sealants. 2. Section 092900"Gypsum Board"for sealing perimeter joints. 3. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch= wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. B. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. ' 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: t1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installers Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 B. Special Manufacturers Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. ' 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturers written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. ' JOINT SEALANTS 079200-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the , weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. C. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. e. Sika Corporation Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS , A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may tre , incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900. C. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 25. d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. ' e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. g. Schnee-Morehead. Inc.; Permathane SM7100. ' JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' h. Sika Corporation Construction Products Division; Sikaflex- 1a. i. Tremco incorporated; Dymonic. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. C. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead. Inc.; SM 8200.- f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING tA. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1 B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a-surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. ' B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or 1 harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and 1 surfaces adjacent to joints. ' JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of ' joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. , b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- ' sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with ' adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products t and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. JOINT SEALANTS 079200-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time 1 backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. j1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per ' Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage 1 or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. ' JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL END OF SECTION 079200 ' r r i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -7 ' r■� �r rr rr rr �r rr rr r� rr r■i r� r rr r r r� r a� SECTION 080000 - DOOR SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DOOR FRAME DETAILS KEY NOTES Mat'I Fin. DIMENSIONS Mat'I Fin. U.L. GLASS RT'G. TYPE NO. Type Width Height Type HEAD JAMB SILL 201A C HM P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-1 — IG 3/A9-2 4/A9-2 7/A9-2 1, 3 202A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 203A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 _ 1 204A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 205A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 _ 1 206A NOT USED 207A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 208A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 209A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 210A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 211A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 _ 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 212A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 213A A WD P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-1 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 214A B WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 _ TG 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 215A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 - 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 216A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 217A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 218A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 219A A WD STN 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 220A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 1 221A A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 _ 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 -- 1 2218 A WD STN T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 222A A WD P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1,4 223A A WD P-1 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — — 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 223B A WD P-1 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 — �- 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 224A A WD P-1 3'-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-2 _ 1/A9-2 2/A9-2 — 1 225A EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN DOOR SCHEDULE 08000- 1 SECTION 080000 - DOOR SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DOOR FRAME DETAILS KEY NOTES U.L. GLASS Mat 'I Fin. DIMENSIONS Mat'I Fin. RT'G. TYPE NO. Type Width Height Type HEAD JAMB SILL 226A EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN 227A NOT USED 228A C HM P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-1 IG 3/A9-2 4/A9-2 7/A9-2 1,3 229A C HM P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-1 _ IG 5/A9-2 6/A9-2 8/A9-2 1, 3 230A NOT USED 231A C I HM I P-1 T-0" 6'-8" 1 HM P-1 IG 5/A9-2 6/A9-2 8/A9-2 1, 3 ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES HM-HOLLOW METAL 1. Contractor to coordinate door and frame cut-outs with hardware P-X-PAINT/COLOR specified. Verify all opening sizes prior to frame installation. STL-STEEL 2. See Specification Section 088000 for Glass Types noted. STN-STAINED AT FACTORY 3. See Specification Section 099100 for paint color designations. WD-WOOD 4. See Specification Section 087100 for Door Hardware Schedule. 5. Door Frame Details are noted as looking from inside the room. 6. See Frame types on Sht.A9-2 for all detail references. KEY NOTES 1. See Drawing Sheets A9-2 FOR DOOR and FRAME TYPES 2.Strip paint from existing frame and/or door, prime and re-paint 3.Wet location/galvanized frame and hardware. 4. Pair of doors DOOR SCHEDULE 08000-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL - AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors"for wood doors set in hollow-metal frames. ' 2. Section 087100"Door Hardware"for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical-and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. ' 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. C. Samples for Verification: ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of , supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests , performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum ' 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering , products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Deansteel. , 5. DKS Steel Door& Frame Sys. Inc. 6. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 7. Karpen Steel Custom Doors& Frames. 8. LaForce. lnc. ' 9. Megamet Industries, Inc. 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Republic Doors and Frames. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, ' fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. ' B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. ' C. Face: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Mineral board or Vertical steel stiffener. ' 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. ' b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. 1 B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches C. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. 1 e. Core: Mineral board or Vertical steel stiffener. 3. Frames: ' a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 , inch thick. 2. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- ' diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, ' pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. , D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting i of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. , G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass-or mineral-fiber insulation. ' 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-4 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. b. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 4. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and ' mounted in metal-stud partitions. 5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. ' a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA Al 56.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES ' A. Prime Finish: Clean, pre-treat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. , 3.2 PREPARATION , A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed , faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door ' hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. , a. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. b. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and ' secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. In-Place Masonry Veneer Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed , expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and-invisible on exposed faces. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: , a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. ' b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. ' d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-6 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. C. At Bottom of Door. 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow- metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace ' defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. ' C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 1 1 ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 081416- FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary , Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. ' 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Section 081113"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"for hollow metal door frames. , 2. Section 088000"Glazing"for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and ' other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. ' 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. ' D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for ' each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished ' work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. , b. Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory- finished doors. ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. ' 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural ' Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated". 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating ' that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. ' 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: r1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Chappell Door Co. 3. Eggers Industries. ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 4. Graham: an Assa A bloy Group company. ' 5. Haley Brothers, Inc. 6. Ideal Architectural Doors& Plywood. ' 7. Lambton Doors. 8. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 9. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.: a Masonite company. 10. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. ' 11. Vancouver Door Company. 12. VT Industries Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL ' A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do ' not contain urea formaldehyde. B. Particleboard-Core Doors: ' 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows: , a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, , mop, or armor plates. C. 5-inch mid-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH ' A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: ' 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: White ash. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). , 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. ' 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor- door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads ' as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. ' 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3 , ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply ' with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI All 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment ' before factory machining. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. ' 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. =Comply with applicable requirements in-Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING ' A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, ' before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. ' C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. ' 3. Staining: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin or Semi-gloss; as selected by Owner. 1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing ' characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100"Door Hardware". , B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. , D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at ' Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING ' A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. ' Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-5 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 087100- DOOR HARDWARE ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: ' 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Section 064116 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets" for cabinet door hardware provided as part of architectural woodwork. 2. Section 081113"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"for door hardware applications. 3. Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors"for door hardware applications. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. ' B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing ' fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. ' a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work ' to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers ' as in the Contract Documents. C. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations, of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. ' DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, , function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. , 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. ' 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key ' set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of , comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS , A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and , extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC). C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. , D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks do ' not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility ' Guidelines. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. ' 3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware ' schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. ' C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. ' 1.8 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, .and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made ' for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.9 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. ' b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. ' 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. ' a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE , A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and , maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE ' A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in the "Door Hardware Schedule" to comply with requirements in this Section. , 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. , B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the "Door Hardware Schedule". Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: , 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. ' Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the"Door Hardware Schedule". 2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product ' indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries. Inc. ' C. Hager Companies. d. IVES Hardware: an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Lawrence Hardware Inc. f. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Stanley Commercial Hardware: Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES ' A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. , B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latch-bolt throw. ' 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latch-bolt throw. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Mortise Locks: BHMA Al 56.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Best Access Systems-, Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. SARGENT Manufacturing Company an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division: an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Yale Security Inca an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.4 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA Al 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. ' 1. Existing System: ' a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: ' a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: ' a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. ' d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.5 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with ' manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: ' a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. DORMA Architectural Hardware: Member of The DORMA Group North America. C. LCN Closers: an Ingersoll-Rand company. ' d. Norton Door Controls: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Yale Security Inca an ASSA ABLOY Group company. ' DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.6 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS , A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg.. Inc. r b. Baldwin Hardware-Corporation. C. Hager Companies. d. IVES Hardware: an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware: Div. of The Stanley Works. f. Trimco. 2.7 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA Al 56.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products, Inc. C. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.: an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Sealeze: a unit of Jason Incorporated. f. Zero International. ' 2.8 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with -requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Hager Companies. C. Hiawatha, Inc. d. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.: Div. of InPro Corporation. e. IVES Hardware: an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. g. Trimco. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade , name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. ' DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming ' method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA All 56.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not ' permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.10 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a- strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations ' in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have-been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." ' DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where ' cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment ' substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. ' C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for ' door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. ' E. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with floor when door is closed. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including ' whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.4 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and 1 requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without ' damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Reference"Door Hardware Schedule" immediately following this Section. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 087100-01 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES 1. Locks/Latches: Manufacturer: Best L1 Perimeter Lock: 9K-3-7-IN-15-S3-626-SH L2 Classroom Lock: 9K-3-7-R-15-S3-626 L3 Storeroom Lock: 9K-3-7-D-15-S3-626 L4 Perimeter Lock: 45H-7-INL-15-R-626-SH-VT 2. Hinges: Manufacturer: McKinney H1 HT2714-4.5 X 4.5(1.5 pair) 3. Door Operators: Manufacturer: Norton D01 (See Spec 084229) 60-6-0-RF-691 with(2) 531 RF wall switches 4. Closers: Manufacturer: Norton C1 7705M ST-689 5. Stop/Holders: Manufacturer: Trimco/Glynn-Johnson HS1 Wall Bumper 1270CX(Trimco) HS2 Overhead Stop GJ450H series(Glynn-Johnson) 6. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer: Pemko WS1 S88BL(At head and jamb) WS2 19325D (Threshold) WS3 411 ARL(automatic door bottom) WS4 S773(sound gasket) 7. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer: As Noted M1 Kick Plate 194S-US32D (Hager) M2 Silencers 1229A(Trimco) M3 Door Safety Guard LCN 700(push side)Alum. M4 Door Safety Guard LCN 750(pull side)Alum. M5 Automatic Flush Bolts Cal-Royal AUTOFLMl-26 M6 Coordinators Cal-Royal DORC01 with FB3258 Filler Bar; aluminum DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710-01 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DOOR CLOSER or STOP/ WEATHER NO. LOCK HINGE OPERATOR HOLDER STRIPPING MISC. COMMENTS Level 1 West L4 ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- Replace existing lock Stair Level 1 East L4 ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- Replace existing lock Stair L1 H1 C1 ----- WS1S2, ----- Perimeter Door 201A M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door --S 202A L2 H1 ----- HS2 only. L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 203A only. 204A L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate onop lyh� side of door L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 205A I i I only. 206A NOT USED L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 207A only. L2 H1 ---- HS2 — M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 208A only. L2 1-11 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 209A only. L2 H1 ----- HS2 ---- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 210A only. L2 H1 ---- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 1211A only. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710-01 -2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DOOR CLOSER or STOP/ WEATHER NO. LOCK HINGE OPERATOR HOLDER STRIPPING MISC. COMMENTS L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 212A only. 213A L3 H1 C1 --- WS1 M2 ----- 214A L2 H1 C1 ---- WS4 M2 ----- L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 215A only. L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate onpushside of door 216A L2 H1 ----- HS2 ---- M1, M2 Kick Plate onpushside of door 217A only. 218A L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on puh side of door only. L2 1-11 ----- HS2 M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 219A only. L2 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate on push side of door 220A only. Ll H1 C1 ----- ----- M1, M2 Kick Plate onpushside of door 221A Kick Plate on push side of door y. 221B L1 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M1, M2 only. 222A L3 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M2, M5, M6 Pair 223A L3 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M2 ----- 2236 L3 H1 ----- HS2 ----- M2 ----- 224A L3 H1 C1 ----- M2 ----- 225A EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO REMAIN 226A EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO REMAIN 227A I NOT USED DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710-01 -3 M * on I" aw on tm an M. an i" am an w O ar �. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL DOOR CLOSER or STOP/ WEATHER NO. LOCK HINGE OPERATOR HOLDER STRIPPING MISC. COMMENTS L1 H1 C1 _____ WS1,WS2, _____ Perimeter Door 228A WS3 L4 H1 D01 _____ WS1,WS2, Perimeter Door 229A I WS3 230A NOT USED L4 H1 C1 ____ WS1,WS2, Perimeter Door 231A WS3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710-01 -4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 088000-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED-DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows (for replacement glass in existing window frames only). 2. Doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 081113"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"for glass panels in hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors"for glass panels in wood doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Inter-space: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each.type of the following products; 12 inches square. 1. Insulating glass. 2. Monolithic vision glass. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. GLAZING 088000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain float glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's"Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. GLAZING 088000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. WarrantyPeriod: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4-inch. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4-inch thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. GLAZING 088000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Guardian Industries. 2. Oldcastle Glass, Inc. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Viracon, Inc. B. Insulating-Glass Units. Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated inter-space, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal,with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types"Article. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. GLAZING 088000-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, ' Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 790. b. GE Advanced Materials-Silicones: SilPruf LM SCS2700. C. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated, Spectrem 1. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5: D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and 1 density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product GLAZING 088000-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES 1 A. Glass Type TG: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 1/4-inch. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES !■ A. Glass Type IG: Clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4-inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass. 4. Inter-space Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .20 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .22 maximum_ PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 3. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. GLAZING 088000-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. ' G. Provide edge blocking where needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. GLAZING 088000-7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING(DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weather-tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weather-tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. GLAZING 088000-8 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000-9 ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF-ABOVE FINISH FLOOR GWB-GYPSUM BOARD 1. SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS/LOCATIONS CPT-X-CARPET TILE/COLOR LIN-X-LINOLEUM/TYPE/COLOR 2.SEE DRAWING SHEET A9-1 FOR BASE DETAILS EM-ENTRY MAT MATERIAL P-X-PAINT/COLOR (E)-EXISTING PLYWD-PLYWOOD KEY NOTES EFTR-EXISTING MATERIAL/FINISH TO REMAIN RB-X-4"HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O. 1.PROVIDE LATEX-BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL WALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT-EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 2.PLYWD FROM TOP OF RESILIENT BASE TO 8'-4"AFF ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL CEILING WALLS ROOM# ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST NOTES EM SAT-2 201 RECEPTION CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 202 IEH OFFICE CPT-1 R13-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 203 EH OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 204 EH OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 205 STUDENT OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 206 STAFF AREA LIN-1A RB-1 SAT-2 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 207 EH OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 208 EH OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 209 HS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 210 HS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 211 HS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 090000-1 ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF-ABOVE FINISH FLOOR GWB-GYPSUM BOARD 1. SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS/LOCATIONS CPT-X-CARPET TILE/COLOR LIN-X-LINOLEUM/TYPE/COLOR 2.SEE DRAWING SHEET A9-1 FOR BASE DETAILS EM-ENTRY MAT MATERIAL P-X-PAINT/COLOR (E)-EXISTING PLYWD-PLYWOOD KEY NOTES EFTR-EXISTING MATERIAL/FINISH TO REMAIN RB-X-4"HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O. 1.PROVIDE LATEX-BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL WALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT-EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 2.PLYWD FROM TOP OF RESILIENT BASE TO 8'-4"AFF ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL CEILING WALLS ROOM# ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST NOTES 212 HS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 213 STORAGE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 214 CONFERENCE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 215 HHS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 216 HHS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 217 HHS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 218 HHS OFFICE CPT-1 R13-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 219 HHS OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 220 EH OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 221FILE/WORK ROOM LIN-1A RB-1 SAT-1 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 222 STORAGE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 090000-2 rr M, M r am �rr r■r r it rr� s r INS we so m a" Nom so r m r m ate, IM� m ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF-ABOVE FINISH FLOOR GWB-GYPSUM BOARD 1. SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS/LOCATIONS CPT-X-CARPET TILE/COLOR LIN-X-LINOLEUM/TYPE/COLOR 2.SEE DRAWING SHEET A9-1 FOR BASE DETAILS EM-ENTRY MAT MATERIAL P-X-PAINT/COLOR (E)-EXISTING PLYWD-PLYWOOD KEY NOTES EFTR-EXISTING MATERIAL/FINISH TO REMAIN RB-X-4"HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O. 1.PROVIDE LATEX-BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL WALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT-EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 2.PLYWD FROM TOP OF RESILIENT BASE TO 8'-4"AFF ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL CEILING WALLS ROOM# ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST NOTES EXP P-1 P-1 223 IT CLOSET LIN-1A RB-1 STRUCT --- PLYWD P-1 PLYWD P-1 2 224 IJANITOR EFTR EFTR EFTR 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 1 225 MEN'S TOILET EFTR EFTR EFTR 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 1 226 WOMEN'S TOILET EFTR EFTR EFTR 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 1 SAT-2 227 AISLE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 EM SAT-2 228 VESTIBULE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" --- P-1 P-1 P-1 EM SAT-2 229 IAISLE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 --- P-1 SAT-2 230 AISLE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 EM SAT-2 231 AISLE CPT-1 RB-1 GWB 8'-0" P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 090000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For shaft wall assemblies and fire-stop tracks, from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. i GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23- 1 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 hour. B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. D. Fire-stop Tracks: Provide fire-stop track at head of shaft wall on roof level. E. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board. F. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaft-liner board, Type X. G. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each ' area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Shaft-liner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire- resistive liner panels with paper faces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner. b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Shaft-liner. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock Fireguard Shaft-liner. d. Lafarge North America, Inc.; Firecheck Type X Shaft-liner. e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaft-liner. f. PABCO Gypsum; Pabcore Shaft-liner Type X. 1 g. Temple-Inland Inc.; Fire-Rated SilentGuard Gypsum Shaft-liner System. h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel. 1 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Long Edges: Double bevel. C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900"Gypsum Board." 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 unless otherwise indicated. B. Fire-stop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. C. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Corner-bead and edge trim of material and shapes as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required withstanding loading j conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900"Gypsum Board". F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 092900"Gypsum Board". >� PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer t present, including hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23-3 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturers written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. D. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. E. Fire-stop- Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity -of fire-resistance-rated 1 assembly indicated. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces varies no more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 PROTECTION jA. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ' END OF SECTION 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23-4 i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 092216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: For each type of product. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. , 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge or as noted. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in ' thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216- 1 i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The);VertiClip SLD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim: Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width required. 1 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or as noted. 1 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 1 A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. ' C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. j1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge. ' b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. ta. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge. E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation: Drywall Grid System. C. USG Corporation: Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced-installation standards. r 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding ' power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of ' overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES ' A. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural ' supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. I a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 1 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member, so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS ' A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. I B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. ' 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, 1 and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet ' measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. ' END OF SECTION 092216 i 1 1 I 1 t 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-5 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 - M BOARD SECTION 092900 GYPSUM 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary IConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Texture finishes. 1 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. IB. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in six inch long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: i a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturers written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold i damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, ' discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and ' that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. ' 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. , GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Corner-bead. b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 1 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible ' with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Pre-filling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping ' compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. ' 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Accumetric LLC: BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products: Acoustical Sealant GSC. C. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL d.. Specified Technologies, Inc.: Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. ' e. USG Corporation: SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. ' B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.: ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company: Perfect Spray EM Texture. C. USG Corporation: BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. 2. Texture: Orange Peel. ' PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION , A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold , damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. , 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL , A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints incentral area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with , not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. , E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached ' to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily ' installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: All vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. ' B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES IA. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: ' 1. Corner-bead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. L-Bead: Use where required. 1 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, ' fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required, to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Pre-fill open joints and damaged surface areas. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not ' intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ' ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Concealed areas and where indicated. , 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099100 "Painting." , 3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other ' surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a ' uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture ' finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and ' over-spray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, , construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. ' 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 , GYPSUM BOARD 092900-6 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 SECTION 095113-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Section includes seismic design of system to comply with IBC Chapter 16, Risk Category D-1. C. Section includes submittal of seismic design to City of Port Angeles as a Deferred Submittal. ' Contractor to pay all permit fees. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product specified, 6 inches in size. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, ' prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items 1 are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. ' 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: 1 a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. ' 5. Perimeter moldings. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified ' testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and ' fastener type, from ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. ' 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ' A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in ' original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized 1 moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. , 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, , and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions ' determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. ' 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension ' system from single source from single manufacturer. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. ' 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; "Dune" Second Look, Fine Texture, #2712 or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors Inca Subsidiary of USG Corporation. ' B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: ' 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.80. ' E. NRC: Not less than 0.50. F. CAC: Not less than 35. ' G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt-on short edges. H. Thickness: 3/4 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 1 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty-hung metal ' suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, ' Table 1, "Direct Hung,"unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so- its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire. ' D. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces, as required. E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic , forces, as required. F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical ' panels in place, as required. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World ' Industries, Inc.; 15/16-inch "Prelude" or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. ' 3. USG Interiors, Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World , Industries, Inc.; "Prelude"or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. Fry Reglet Corporation. 4. Gordon, Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corporation. ' B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as ' that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. ' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical ' panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Design system to comply with seismic codes per IBC. ' C. Submit to, and gain approval from, City of Port Angeles prior to start of installation. D. Pay all required permit fees to City of Port Angeles. E. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply ' with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturers written instructions and CISCA's ' "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 1 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from ' hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 6. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four ' tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and ' where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not ' more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. ' E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system ' runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. , 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. ' 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. , 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special ' inspections: 1. Compliance of seismic design. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed-installations of acoustical panel ceiling ' hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations show compliance with requirements. ' 1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed. ' a. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and post-installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 Ibf of tension; it will also select one of every two post-installed ' anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 Ibf of tension. b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with , requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-6 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' D. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. ' E. Prepare test and inspection reports. ' 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and ' touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 1 1 ' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 096513-RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. ' 2. Resilient molding accessories. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Section 096516.13"Linoleum Flooring"for linoleum floor coverings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. , B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturers standard-size Samples but not less than 4 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern , required. C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. , 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective ' covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each , type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ' ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: ' 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. ' B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. ' C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 RESILIENT BASE RB-1 A. Resilient Base: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products: Division of Burke Industries. Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. 1 C. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. ' 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. ' D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. ' F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. ' RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL H. Finish: Low luster. , I. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Resilient Wall Base and ' Accessories Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY , A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products: Division of Burke Industries, Inc. ' b. Flexco, Inc. C. Roppe Corporation, USA. ' B. Description: Transition strips. C. Material: Vinyl. ' D. Profile and Dimensions: As required. E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Resilient Wall Base and ' Accessories Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS , A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and ' substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to , 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. ' B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. , C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-3 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of ' resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching ' compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. ' 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. ' D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. ' 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. ' D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. ' E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's ' recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening)at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for instaAing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates ' throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet or resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. ' 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturers'written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. ' RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: ' 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. ' 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction ' operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. ' 3.6 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES COLOR SCHEDULE A. RB-1: Flexco, Flextones,#01 "Black Dahlia". B. Vinyl Transition Strips: Flexco, Flextones, #01 "Black Dahlia". , END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-5 ' tCLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 096516.13-LINOLEUM FLOORING ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Linoleum floor tile. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, transition strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. D. Product Schedule: For floor covering. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. ' 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. ' 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and ' pattern of floor tile installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are ' competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by ' manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. DELIVERY STORAGE , 1.8 , AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with , ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. , 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time , periods: 1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by ' manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. ' D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be ' incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13-2 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1. Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Marmoleum Composition Tile"MCT". 2. Architect accepted equal. ' 2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING LINA ' A. Floor-Tile: ASTM F 2195, Type I, linoleum floor tile with fibrous backing. 1. Nominal Floor Tile Size: Manufacturer's standard. ' B. Seaming Method: Standard. C. Thickness: 0.08 inch. D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in the Linoleum Floor Coverings Color Schedule at the End of Part 3. ' 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS ' A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. ' B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. ' 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor ' coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. ' 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical ' methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of , water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. ' D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before ' installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for installing floor coverings. , B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. ' C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by , repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent-marking device. E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor-covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to covererimeters. P ' F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks voids raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.4 LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. 1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated. B. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed ' floor tiles. 1. Lay floor tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent floor tiles (basket-weave pattern) in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. ' 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 4. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction ' operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Seal linoleum as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. 3. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover ' floor coverings until Substantial Completion. 3.6 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS COLOR SCHEDULE A. Linoleum Floor Tile colors are to match as follows: ' 1. LIN-1A: Marmoleum Composition Tile"MCT with Topshield, #3120, "Rosato". END OF SECTION 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 096813-TILE CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: ' 1. Section 024119"Selective Structure Demolition"for removing existing floor coverings. ' 2. Section 096513 'Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 3. Section 096516.13"Linoleum Flooring"for floor finishes installed adjacent to carpet tile. 4. Section 124813"Entrance Floor Mats and Frames"for entrance mat carpet tile. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. ' 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. ' 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 7. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 6-inch-long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. TILE CARPETING 096813- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. ' C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: ' 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. ' 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. ' 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floor-covering Installers Association. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet the identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. ' B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, ' install carpet tiles before installing these items. TILE CARPETING 096813-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 CARPET TILE , A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Shaw Contract Group,#59357, "Blox", Modular Carpet Tile or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Interface FLOR, LLC. 2. Architect accepted equal. B. Color: As indicated by Manufacturer's designations in the Tile Carpeting Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based ' formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to ' 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other ' conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness ' TILE CARPETING 096813- 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, Boles and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more ' stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules;' and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as ' recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking ' device. G. Install carpet tiles parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. TILE CARPETING 096813-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, 'Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet the against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 3.5 TILE CARPETING COLOR SCHEDULE A. CPT-1: Shaw Contract Group, #59357, "Blox", #56321, "Coastal Getaway", Modular Carpet Tile. END OF SECTION 096813 r t TILE CARPETING 096813-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 099100- PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to ' shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of me- chanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint pre-finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 062023 'Interior Finish Carpentry" for surface preparation of interior finish car- pentry. 2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 3. Section 092900"Gypsum Board"for surface preparation of gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms-defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured ata 60-degree meter. PAINTING 099100- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at ' a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each mate- rial and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each , material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material pro- posed for use. ' 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOCs). B. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actu- al conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demon- , strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- fied. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con- tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free ' of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. PAINTING 099100-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround- ing air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. ' C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during applica- tion and drying periods. ' 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quan- tities described below. Package, paint materials in un-opened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver-extra materials to the Owner. ' 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 3. Pratt& Lambert, Inc. (P & Q. 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). 1 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and appli- cation, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and-field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. ' 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. PAINTING 099100-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations in the Painting ' Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. , 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and sur- faces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. , 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and condi- tions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compati- bility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteris- tics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over sub- , strates primed by others. , 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix- tures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning pro- cess will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturers writ- ten instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shel- lac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including paneling. PAINTING 099100-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of var- nish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean un-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use sol- vent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's(SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and ac- cording to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. ' b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with-a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written in- structions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign ' materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. ' 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri- mental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur- faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. -6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non-specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. ' 7. Paint backside of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed sur- faces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, side edges and interior faces the same as exterior ' faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other- wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur- face deterioration. PAINTING 099100-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of applica- tion method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recom- mended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and-appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thick- ness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators , according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommend- ' ed spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items ' exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by , the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Re-coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other de- fects due to insufficient sealing. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holi- days, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be ac- ceptable. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as re- quired by the Owner: ' a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. PAINTING 099100-6 , CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Re-coating. k. Skinning. ' I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded ' paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. ' 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim: 1. Medium-Shade, Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. ' a. Primer: Exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 1) Miller: 6040, 100%Acrylic, Penetrating Pigmented Primer-Sealer. 2) PPG: 72-1 Sun-Proof Exterior House &Trim Wood Primer Flat--Latex. 3) P& L: S/D 1002 Suprime"2" Exterior Latex Wood Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, waterborne, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. t1) Miller: 7500 Acri-Lite 100 percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. ' 3) P& L: Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House&Trim Finish. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. PAINTING 099100-7 r CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. ' a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Miller: 5000 Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish. 2) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 3) P& L: S/D 1009 Suprime"9"interior/Exteri;orAlkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Miller: 5200 Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish Semi-Gloss. ' 2) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 3) P& L: Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House&Trim Finish. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE ' A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semi-gloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by ' the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.. 1) Miller: 6020 High-Solids PVA Primer-Sealer. ' 2) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer-Sealer. 3) P& L: Z/F 1001 Suprime"1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-Purpose Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at , spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Miller: 7200 Series Acrinamel Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. 3) P& L: Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss. 2. Semi-gloss,Waterborne Epoxy Finish:-2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd-or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Miller: 6040, 100%Acrylic, Penetrating Pigmented Primer-Sealer. 2) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Pri- mer. 3) P& L: Z/F 1001 Suprime"1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi Purpose Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, waterborne epoxy applied at spreading rate , recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. PAINTING 099100-8 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1) Miller: 4200 Waterborne Epoxy Coating. 2) PPG: Aquapon 35 Polyamide—Epoxy Coating. 3) PPG: Pitt-Glaze WB Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy. rB. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over interior wood sur- faces: 1. Semi-gloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoat. a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoat, as recom- mended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recom- mended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. ' 1) Miller: 2840 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat. 2) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water-Based Undercoat. 3) P& L: Z/F 1001 Suprime"1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-Purpose Primer. rb. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Miller: 1005 Evolution Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss ' Latex. 3) P& L: Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as rec- ommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate rec- ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) Miller: 5000 Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish. 2) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. ' 3) P & L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer. b. Finish Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Miller: 5200 Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. 3) P& L: Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss. 3.9 PAINTING COLOR SCHEDULE ' A. P-1: Color to Match Color Guild#3857, "Linen White". B. P-2: Color to Match Color Guild#8772W, "Siberian Ice". PAINTING 099100-9 r CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET r BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL END OF SECTION 099100 ' 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 r 1 r i r 1 1 PAINTING 099100- 10 r ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 102800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. ' 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject ' to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ' 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. Architect accepted equal. B. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle TA1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-3942. 2. Description: Semi-Recessed Convertible Combination Unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Semi-recessed. a. Designed for nominal 5-inch wall depth. ' 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal. ' 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors ' and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. ' B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and re-supplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. ' TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate ' to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated_ 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. ' C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturers'written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 104413-FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: , a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 104416"Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, ' cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. , C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square. ' E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. ' 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ' A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, ' Class 1 (clear). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET ' A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire End &Croker Corporation. b. J L Industries Inc a division of Activar Construction Products Group. C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Modern Metal Products. Division of Technico Inc.. f. Moon-American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. eh. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter doorframe overlapping ' surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation. 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. ' F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. ' FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass(clear). ' I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet ' type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch or projecting door pull and friction latch or recessed door pull and friction latch. ' 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, or concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: ' 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers , indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. , 3. Door Lock: Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets. 4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE ' EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. , 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. ' K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder coat paint for the following: , a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another material or finish. ' b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. ' 2.3 FABRICATION e A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. ' 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. , 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. , 1. Fabricate doorframes with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413- 3 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2. Miter and weld perimeter doorframes. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. ' 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. iC. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. ' Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, 'White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. ' B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturers written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed ' cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not , indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. ' 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING , A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. , C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. ' E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-5 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 104416- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section 104413"Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. ' 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." ' B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. ' FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or ' replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. ' b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Amerex Corporation. ' b. Ansul Incorporated: Tyco International Ltd. C. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. ' e. Fire End &Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries Inca a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division: Subsidiary of Kidde Pic. ' h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. i. Moon-American. j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.: a division of PEM Systems. Inc. k. Potter Roemer LLC. , I. fro-Chem: Tyco Safety Products. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. , 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. B. Regular Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2.5-Ib nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. ' 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-2 ' 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of ' authorities having jurisdiction. 1 END OF SECTION 104416 1 1 1 i i 1 1 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 122113-HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. ' B. Related Requirements: ' 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry".for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind. ' 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. ' D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Slat: Not less than 6 inches long. , 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. 3. Valance: Complete unit, 9 inches wide. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of horizontal louver blind, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency. ' 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ' A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each ' size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, but no fewer than two units. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. ' 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. ' 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and ' finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed ' units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bali, 1" ' Customiser@)Aluminum Blinds or comparable product by one of the following: HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 2. Levolor Contract: a Newell Rubbermaid company. 3. Springs Window Fashions. , B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius comers. 1. Width: 1 inch. i 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. ' 4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. C. Head-rail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Head-rails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides. ' 1. Capacity: One blind per head-rail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ends: Capped or plugged. 3. Manual Lift Mechanism: a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full operating range. ' b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. 4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ' ladders. a. Tilt: Full. b. Operator: Clear-plastic wand. C. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear. ' 5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Length required to extend to 48 inches above floor level when blind is fully closed. 6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Right side and left side of head-rail, ' respectively unless otherwise indicated. 7. Integrated Head-rail/Valance: Curved face. D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ' ladders and lift cords and has plastic-or metal-capped ends. 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard. , E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across head-rail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. 1. Type: Cloth tape, manufacturer's standard width. G. Valance: Two slats. ' H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Type: As indicated. ' HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. ' I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturers standard. J. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturers standard. K. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: ' 1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. ' 2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. 1 B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: ' 1. Between (Inside)Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. C. Concealed Components: Non-corrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket ' positions and blind placement indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal 1 noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturers standard baked finish complying with manufacturers written instructions for surface preparation including ' pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances and other conditions affecting ' performance. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. , 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 2 inches from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1-1/2 inches from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ' ranges of blinds. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of head-rails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and ' similar building components and furnishings. 3.3 ADJUSTING t A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION , A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ' C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113-5 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 123623.13-PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate and adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in plastic-laminate countertops. 2. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. ' C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with ' one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program ' certificates. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE t A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. ' PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. i 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than ' installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet , work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify ' dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. , PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork ' Standards"for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that ' countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard , and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. ' C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Formica Corporation. ' b. Panolam Industries International. Inc. C. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. , D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations, referenced in the Plastic Laminate Color ' Schedule at the end of Part 3. PLASC TI -LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13-2 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. ' G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch. ' 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of ' countertop substrate. ' 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless ' otherwise indicated. ' 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and ' matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series'' by Doug Mockett &Company, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. B. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Resorcinol. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. ' C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ' 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end ' overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to t Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will ' be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check ' PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for ' shipment. C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, electrical work, and , similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. ' 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 PREPARATION ' A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation ' areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back-priming. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not ' completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, electrical work, and similar items. ' 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. ' Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. ' E. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. ' 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls ' with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material ' manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. ' PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' B. Clean countertops on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. ' 3.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE COLOR SCHEDULE ' A. Plastic Laminate PLAM-#: Where this designation is indicated, provide plastic laminate complying with the following type/color/finish numbers: 1. PLAM-1: Nevamar#FS5001 T, "Alpine Fissure", Textured. END OF SECTION 123623.13 ' PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL t SECTION 124813-ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient-tile entrance mats. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the floor mat, in manufacturer's standard sizes. ' 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS t A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective , covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, ' but no fewer than 10 units. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 RESILIENT-TILE ENTRANCE MATS ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Shaw Contract Group, Steppin' Out Collection, Welcome II Tile or a comparable product by one of the , following: 1. American Floor Products Company. Inc. ' 2. American Mat& Rubber Company. 3. Cactus Mat Mfg. Co. 4. Consolidated Plastics Company, Inc. 5. Durable Corporation. , ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 6. Flexco. 7. Mats Inc. 8. Musson Rubber Company. ' 9. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division. 10. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc. 11. Turtle Plastics. ' B. Carpet-Type Tiles: PET Polyester carpet bonded to performance rubber backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with non-raveling edges. ' 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in the Entrance Floor Mats and Frames Color Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2. Tile Size: 24-inch by 24-inch. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements affecting installation of floor mats. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 3.3 PROTECTION ' A. After completing installation, provide temporary protective cover. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. ' 3.4 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES COLOR SCHEDULE A. EM-1: Shaw Contract Group, #5T031, Welcome II Tile, #31481, "Multicolor". END OF SECTION 124813 ' ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 200100—MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) , PART1 GENERAL , 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes, but is not limited to: ' 1. Provide all labor, materials,equipment, tools, and perform all work to furnish the complete design and construction for heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing of the ' project. 2. Design, construct and coordinate the complete system to meet the intent of the architectural design documents. Install work within the initial space accommodations or ' make other provisions at no additional cost the Owner and maintain the initial architectural and structural integrity. 3. Provide electrical load information to Electrical Subcontractor. Electrical Contractor to ' connect all mechanical equipment. Control wiring is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. See Division 26. , 4. Subcontractors are required to fully coordinate their work with other subcontractors. Any cost of remedy for lack thereof is the responsibility of these Subcontractors. 5. Complete work expeditiously and within requirements of published project schedule(s) of ' Architect and Owner. 6. Obtain and pay for all permits and pay all fees required by local jurisdictional authorities , and utilities. 7. Arrange for and schedule all tests required by local jurisdictional authorities and utilities. ' 8. The Architect will act on the Owner's behalf as advisors on technical matters of interest to the Owner. The obligations of the Design/Build Contractor are in no way alleviated by the ' Architect's involvement on the project. The obligation, responsibility and/or liability of the Design/Build Contractor are in no way reduced or diminished by the Architect's review of the design or installation. B. Code Required Fire Resistive Standards: 1. Portions of this building are required by Code to be constructed to fire resistive standards. , Include in the design provisions to meet all code requirements. 2. Plastic pipe is specified in some sections that follow. Provide code required metal pipe sections or UL listed assemblies at locations where fire resistive construction is penetrated ' by plastic pipe. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Advise the General Contractor of all concrete work associated with the installation of the mechanical systems. The General Contractor will provide the concrete work utilizing information provided by the Design/Build Contractor. ' MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) 200100- 1 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Codes and Standards: ' 1. Comply with all Federal, State, City and other applicable codes and ordinances including applicable provisions of following: ' a. International Building Code(2012 IBC) b. International Mechanical Code(2012 IMC) C. Uniform Plumbing Code(2012 UPC) ' d. Washington State Energy Code e. NFPA 2. If any conflict arises between the Specifications or codes and ordinances, immediately ' notify the Architect. Do not deviate from the Drawings and specifications nor install any work which may be in conflict with codes and ordinances until the conflict is resolved and the solution approved by the Architect. ' B. Materials: Except as otherwise permitted by specification designation, provide new materials of standard make and current manufacture. Where applicable, conform to ASME, ASTM, NFPA or other requirements and have UL listing. Select Equipment to fit space provided. ' C. Workmanship: Run piping parallel to building, keep as inconspicuous as possible, and grade evenly. Set equipment plumb and true with easy access for maintenance. Off-set piping as required to provide for proper and necessary clearances. Provide adequate clearances for ' repair and service of mechanical equipment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES ' A. Submit typed schedule on Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. ' B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 30 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Divide value of work into the following categories: Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements(Miscellaneous Overhead Expenses). 2. Mechanical Insulation Labor. ' 3. Mechanical Insulation Materials. 4. Plumbing Labor. ' 5. Plumbing Materials. 6. HVAC Labor. 7. HVAC Equipment(Purchased Items: Units, Fans, Grilles, etc.) ' 8. HVAC Materials(Fabricated Items: Piping, Sheetmetal, etc.) 9. Controls. ' MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) 200100-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 10. Balancing. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS , A. Drawings and Calculations: Submit for review in accordance with Section 013300. 1. Provide a coordinated, Washington State Licensed Engineer Stamped set of ' construction documents ready for permit submission to the building department containing as a minimum the following: a. Equipment schedule sheet(s)defining performance characteristics of all items of , equipment. Include efficiencies, brake horsepower and motor sizes on all rotating equipment, such as fans. b. System distribution and equipment location plans drawn at 1/4" = T-0"scale. Show t on plans evidence of coordination with all other construction trades. C. Mechanical equipment room plans and sections drawn at 1/2" = 1'-0"scale. d. Miscellaneous details and large scale plans and sections necessary to show coordination in congested areas. ' 2. Provide the following calculations for review: a. Room by Room heating and cooling load calculations for areas with central HVAC , system and System Calculations showing the affect of minimum outside air quantities on unit capacities. b. Heating calculations for the remaining areas. C. Water Heater Sizing. ' B. Submittals before construction begins: Submit for review in accordance with Section 013300. 1. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim. ' 2. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment. C. Record Drawings: Submit for review in accordance with Section 017839. ' 1. Deviations: Record changes to mechanical systems, including locations, sizes, or arrangement. ' 2. Location of Concealed Work: Locate accurately to scale and dimension from building features, concealed piping and ductwork. ' 3. Location of Valves and Cleanouts: Locate accurately to scale and dimension from building features 1.5 COORDINATION , A. Maintain qualified supervisory personnel on job to coordinate work and space utilization with , other trades-involved. Supervisor must be completely familiar with operation and requirements of equipment being installed and be responsible for job during entire construction period. Prior to request for final review, be certain that equipment and controls are functioning properly. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 SYSTEM TYPE ' A. Domestic Water Heating: Electric. B. Space Heating: Existing constant volume electric heat pumps. ' MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) 200100-3 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Plumbing Sizing Criteria: 1. Domestic Water: Size per 2015 Washington Plumbing Specialty Code, Appendix"A", using 5 psi per 100'drop, 8 f.p.s. maximum velocity for cold water and 5 f.p.s. for hot ' water as limiting criteria. 2. Waste and Vent: Size per Code. ' 3. Water Heaters: Size per ASHRAE Guide. B. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC): ' 1. Air Distribution: a. Low pressure ducts sized using maximum 0.08 inches water pressure drop per 100 ' feet of duct or maximum 1000 fpm air velocity in duct. b. Exhaust ducts may be sized for maximum 1400 fpm velocity in duct. Select duct size by developed length for small individual exhaust fans per ASHRAE Standard 62.2-2003 Table 7.1 (Summary Listed Below.) ' Maximum duct length by duct size for CFM. Le end: X= Not Allowed, NL= No Limit, Deduct 15' for each elbow. Duct Type Flex Flex Flex Flex Smooth Smooth Smooth Smooth ' Fan CFM 50 80 100 125 50 80 100 120 Rating ' At 0.25" SP Duct Diameter 3" X X X X 5' X X X 4" 70' 3' X X 105' 35' 5' X ' 5" NL 70' 35' 20' NL 135' 85' 55' 6" NL NL 125' 95' NL NL NL 145' 7" NL NL I NL NL NL NL NL NL 2. Louvers: Size for maximumP ressure drop of 0.08 w.g. and maximum 700 fpm through ' free area. 3. Maximum interior noise levels: 30 NC. t2.3 GUARANTEES A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a ' period of one(1) year from date of substantial completion, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified, such longer term to apply within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period at no additional cost to the Owner, all to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. B. Be responsible for all leaks in all pipes for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of work. Repair all such leaks, at no cost to Owner, within 24 hours of notice by the Owner. Repair MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Performance Specification) 200100-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL leaks which occur prior to the completion of this Subcontract at once. Be responsible for any ' damage caused by such leaks and repair thereof and reimburse Owner for all expenses incurred. 2.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 017823. As a minimum provide the following: ' 1. Manufacturer's literature on all items of equipment. 2. Operating and maintenance instructions. , 3. Wiring and temperature control diagrams. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 BUILDING COMMISSIONING ' A. Provide startup, test and adjustment of each item of mechanical equipment and of complete system by qualified field personnel. B. During final review, demonstrate system operation to Owner that each item of equipment is operating as designed, controls react as required to provide proper conditions and that adjusting have been accomplished in accordance with specifications. ' END OF SECTION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Performance Specification) 200100-5 ' t t CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 200500-MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide material, labor and complete system described and shown. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. References: 1. American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM) publications: ' a. B32 Solder Metal b. B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube ' 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 3. International Conference of Building Officials(ICBO) 4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated (UL) B. Materials: ' 1. Except as otherwise permitted by specification designation, provide new materials of standard make and current manufacture. Where applicable, conform to ASME, ASTM, NFPA or other requirements and have UL listing. Select Equipment to fit space provided. ' C. Workmanship: ' 1. Run piping parallel to building, keep as inconspicuous as possible, and grade evenly. Set equipment plumb and true with easy access for maintenance. Off-set piping as required to provide for proper and necessary clearances. Provide adequate clearances for repair and service of mechanical equipment. D. Coordination: ' 1. Maintain qualified supervisory personnel on job to coordinate work and space utilization with other trades involved. Supervisor must be completely familiar with operation and requirements of equipment being installed and be responsible for job during entire construction period. Prior to request for final review, be certain that equipment and ' controls are functioning properly. PART PRODUCTS ' 2.1 IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: Provide numbered brass disc attached to each valve. Valve numbers in separate series for each section of specification. ' MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Equipment: Provide name plates of black phenolic resin with white 1/2"high letters attached to ' or adjacent to each piece of equipment including but not limited to the following: pumps, air handling units, starters, and switches. Do not use marking pen or Dymo. C. Piping: Band all piping with heat resistant adhesive backed PVC material, width, frequency, ' color and lettering to conform to ANSI A13.1. Indicate fluid in piping and direction of flow. Provide in mechanical, fan and storage rooms and exposed in other finished areas at each ' valve, each change of direction, 20 feet apart on straight runs and at locations where piping enters or leaves space. In concealed areas band at valves, pipe junctions and 40 feet apart on straight runs. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS , A. Domestic Water: ' 1. Pipe-Type L hard drawn copper tubing above ground, Type K soft drawn buried below buildings, Type L soft drawn buried beyond 5 feet from the building perimeter, conforming ' to ASTM B88-2003 specifications. 2. Fittings-Standard wrought copper solder type for 150 psi service conforming to ASME 816.22-(R05) specifications. 3. Unions-All brass. 4. Solder-Tin/Antimony conforming to ASTM B32-2004 specifications. ' 5. Use clearflow dielectric waterway joints between copper and steel piping. B. Domestic Water 1" and smaller: t 1. Pipe—PEX-a Polyethylene tube with cross-linked molecular network structure(using the ' Engel Method conforming to ASTM F876-2005& F877-2005 specifications with 100 psi rating at 180° and 25 year manufacturer's limited warranty. AQUAPEX,9' by Uponor. 2. Fittings- Brass insert fitting with PEX ring and expansion tool. ProPEXP, by Uponor. , 3. Manifolds—Type L copper manifolds with PEX ring and expansion tool. ProPEX9. Copper by Uponor. 4. Tube ends for Stop Valves—Factory assembled Type L copper tube section with brass insert adaptor for use with standard compression feting attached Stop Valve. ProPex9' by Uponor Copper Stub Ell or Copper Straight Stub. ' C. Drain, Waste and Vent: 1. Pipe and fittings: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic drain, waste, and vent ' conforming to ASTM D2661-2006. 2. Provide tracer wire 1' above all underground waste and sewer lines outside building. 3. Pumped Waste-Galvanized, standard weight, steel pipe for 125 psi service conforming to ASTM A53-2004a specifications. Fittings-galvanized banded, malleable iron, screwed conforming to ASME B16.3-(06) specifications. As an option grooved end galvanized pipe ' and fittings with appropriate gasket. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS &METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL t2.3 VALVES: ' A. Minimum working pressure rating 150 psig W.O.G. B. Manufacturer: Apollo, Hammond, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Nibco,or approved equal. ' C. General Valve Requirements: Hammond valve numbers given to establish quality. 1. Gate Valve: a. Two inch (2") and Smaller: Bronze body, inside screw, rising stem, solid disk wedge, screwed bonnet, No. 16640. b. Two and half inch (2Y2") and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, flanged, ' No. IR1140. 2. Globe Valve: a. Two inch (2")and Smaller: Teflon disc, bronze body, bronze trim, No. 16413. b. Two and a half(2'/2") and larger: Iron body, bronze trim, bronze disc hot water, Bun-N disc cold water, No. IR116. 1 3. Check Valve: a. One inch (1") and Smaller: Bronze body, horizontal swing, screwed bonnet, renewable disc, No. 16904. b. One and a quarter(1Y4) and Larger: Iron body, horizontal swing, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, flanged, No. IR1124. C. Non-Slam: Wafer style, spring loaded, silent check valve. Hammond IR9253, or Jergens, Victaulic, Metraflex, Val-matic. Use on pump discharges. ' 4. Ball Valves: Bubble tight shutoff, seats glass filled teflon to minimize seat cold flow. a. One inch (1") and smaller: Full port, 150 psig W.O.G., suitable for 220 F operation, two piece screwed type bronze body, No. 8901/8911. b. One and a quarter (1%4) and larger: Full port, 200 psig W.O.G., suitable for 220 F operation, three piece bolted body allowing replacement of valve assembly without breaking piping, No. 8604/8614. ' 5. Drain Valves: Hose end gate valve or gate valve with hose connection. Do not use sillcocks in lieu of drain valves. 2.4 STRAINERS A. Cast iron body, "Y" pattern strainer, unless noted otherwise, with removable cover and corrosion resisting sediment basket not less than 0.025'thick with total area of perforations 3.3 times cross-sectional area of pipe. Minimum working pressure rating 150 psig W.O.G. B. Provide strainer with 1/16" holes for water service. C. Provide blow-down with nipple and ball valve on all strainers over 2" size. 2.5 PAINTING A. Check equipment furnished under this contract finished with factory applied finish. Clean dirty equipment and refinish mars or scratches to original surface and color. B. Paint one coat flat black on interior of ductwork which can be seen through screens, grilles or diffusers. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL C. Paint all miscellaneous structural supports, including stands, two coats of machinery enamel, color as selected. D. Other painting is specified in Section 099100. ' 2.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Division 26 specifies wiring, provides disconnect switches, mounts starters and makes line ' voltage connections to equipment furnished under Divisions 20-23, unless noted under specific item. Divisions 20-23 provide control wiring, except as indicated, to conform with Division 26 wiring methods. 2.7 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. Conform with voltage, phase and current limitations shown on Division 26 Drawings. Should , equipment approved and furnished under these specifications require additional wiring or electrical service beyond that required by specified equipment, arrange with Division 26 to provide addition at Contractor expense. 2.8 MECHANICAL SUPPORT DEVICES A. Piping: Provide galvanized hangers and shields for the pipe supported. Provide copper plated ' hangers and guides in contact with copper pipe. Increase pipe hanger size for insulation such that insulation is continuous thru hanger. Provide 16 gauge insulation shield for 4" and larger pipe and 20 gauge for 3"and smaller. Length of the shield 6 times nominal pipe diameter ' except minimum length 6 inches. Hanger types permitted are as follows: 1. Clevis-for all pipes-Grinnell Fig. 260. 2. "J" hanger-for all pipes-Superstrut C-711. ' 3. Swivel Ring -for non-insulated pipe-Grinnell Fig. 70. 4. Swivel Ring w/ Shield-for insulated pipes 2 and smaller- Michigan Hanger Co. No. 103. 5. Riser Clamps-for steel and iron pipe-Grinnell Fig. 261, for copper pipe-Grinnell Fig. ' 261c 6. Pipe Rolls-Grinnell Fig. 171, provide pipe covering protection saddles for 1-1/2 inch and larger insulated pipe at each roll -Grinnell Fig. 160. 7. Pipe Guide-Grinnell Fig. 256. 8. Pipe Anchors- Flexonics AC Series or Fee& Mason Fig. 140 welded to pipe. 9. Beam clamps-Grinnell Fig. 61. ' B. Trapeze support systems: Hot rolled steel channel with electrogalvanized finish, clips, fasteners, and clamps with matching finish by same manufacturer. 1. For copper pipe provide neoprene strip between pipe and clamp-Superstrut S-716, plastic tape alone is not acceptable. 2. For insulated pipe provide strap and shield sized for O.D. of insulation - Superstrut C-708 with C-790, universal clamps attached directly to pipe are not permitted. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-4 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 2.9 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide nickel or chrome plated escutcheons with screws or springs for holding plate in position where pipes penetrate floors and walls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' A. Cut work as required for installation and patch to match original conditions as directed and approved by Architect. Do not cut structural portion without Architect's approval. B. Prior to cutting any existing work, locate all concealed utilities to eliminate any possible service interruption or damage. Contractor is responsible for repair or replacement of lines or equipment damaged in existing systems. C. Coordinate with General Contractor to repair ceilings, walls and floors. 3.3 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE A. Relocate or reroute any existing Mechanical work, not otherwise noted, in the way of remodeling and new construction and leave in proper operating condition. In case of question consult Architect. Remove exposed, abandoned piping and cap or plug in concealed location. B. Equipment removed becomes property of Contractor, with exceptions noted. Allow proper credit in bid and remove from site. ' C. Haul debris and material other than equipment from site, unless otherwise arranged. D. Coordinate time of removal with General Contractor so that no mechanical equipment or material is damaged or destroyed in general demolition. E. If Contractor encounters asbestos, stop work in that area and notify Owner. 3.4 PIPE SUPPORTS �. A. Locate hangers, supports, and accessories to support pipelines, valves, and additional concentrated loads. B. Single Pipes: Support horizontal runs of steel and copper pipe under 2"on suitable hangers spaced at not more than 5 feet on centers. Support all steel and copper piping 2" and larger at not more than 10 feet on centers. Support horizontal runs of cast-iron soil pipe at every other joint, unless over 4 feet then support every joint. 1. Independently support piping at equipment, such as duct mounted coils, so that no weight is supported by equipment. 2. Do not spring or bend pipe to fit conditions or to make up joints. Support piping in manner to prevent binding, undue swing, and transmission of vibration to structure. Provide sway bracing where hanger rods are longer than 12" and at maximum spacing of 40 feet. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. Install hangers for insulated piping outside insulation using high density section (6#per cubic foot)of insulation and sheet metal shield. 4. Install minimum of one hanger or brace within two(2)feet from each change of direction in piping. C. Trapeze Hangers: Where pipes are clustered, parallel, and in same plane, support by trapeze hangers. Provide rods and channel sized to suit load imposed. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings. Make sleeves as follows: 1. In frame or similar construction, use 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with edges turned 1/2 inch. , B. Install sleeves flush with surfaces, except in mechanical rooms or on any wet floor where seepage may occur, install 1 inch above floor. C. Size sleeves for insulated piping to allow continuous insulation through sleeve. D. Where sleeves pass through fire rated assemblies: ' 1. Pack annular space between pipe and sleeve with intumescent material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times when exposed to 250 degree F temperature or higher, UL classified with I.C.B.O., B.O.C.A.I., and S.B.C.C.I. (NRB 243) approved ratings to 3 hours per ASTM E814 (UL1479). 2. Acceptable material: 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, Strip and Sheet, or Dow Corning fire stop equivalent putty No. 2000 and 2001 foam. Install escutcheon at exposed penetrations to cover sleeve and spacing sealant. 3.6 TYPICAL PIPING ' A. Provide clearflow dielectric waterway couplings to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals, when use of dissimilar metals cannot be avoided in one system. B. Provide air vents at high points and where piping turns down in direction of flow. C. Close openings in pipes with appropriate caps, plugs, or covers during storage and progress of work to preclude introduction of contaminants. D. Slope pipelines and provide low point drains for piping and equipment. E. Provide valves and unions adjacent to tanks, batteries of plumbing fixtures and equipment, for disconnect purposes. Install valves with stems vertical wherever possible, and in no case with stems below horizontal. F. Provide gate valve and check valve on cold water supply to domestic water make-up connections. G. Ream ends of pipe to full diameter. H. Provide pipe anchors, swing joints, and expansion compensators as required to control expansion of pipelines. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL I. Reduce pipe sizes using reducing tees or reducing fittings. Bushings not permitted except on tanks and similar equipment. J. Provide escutcheons on pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas and where piping is in counters, closets, or cabinets, and subject to view when doors are open. Cover pipe sleeve and secure plate in position. K. Testing: 1. Test all piping to a pressure equal to 1.5 times the working pressure of the system. Hold test pressure for minimum of 4 hours without leakage. Arrange for the Owner's Representative to witness the tests. Provide written report. 2. Leave piping exposed (unconcealed)for observation during testing. Expose any work that was covered or concealed before testing for the duration of the testing period. 3. Repair leaks&defects discovered during testing with new material and re-test until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Testing of portions of the entire system is permitted provided clear documentation is ' included with the test reports showing the extent of the piping under test. 3.7 THREADED PIPE A. Cut threads true and of depth of make up properly without leaks. B. Make connections to show at least two threads and not more than four threads when tight. C. Make up joints with Teflon tape only for domestic water and hydronic systems, as recommended by tape manufacturer, or as specified for individual piping systems. D. Use approved type pipe compound for gas and oil piping. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean exposed, un-insulated piping to remove shipping labels, flux, solder drips, pipe dope, dirt, oil, loose scale or other contaminants. B. Thoroughly flush out and clean each piping system. Be aware of obstructions in piping, such as flow control valves, strainers, etc., during cleaning process. Make provisions to handle these items using by-passes, back-flushing, leaving equipment out and installing temporary connections until piping is clean or whatever is required to accomplish complete cleaning. Clean ductwork in this contract prior to installation of grilles. 3.9 LUBRICATION A. Lubricate equipment properly per manufacturer's recommendations prior to operating and placing in service. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS (Performance Specification) 200500-7 i CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3 SECTION 202500—MECHANICAL INSULATION (Performance Specification) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes specific requirements, products and methods of execution which relate to insulation of ducts, pipes and other surfaces of mechanical systems installation. B. Provide skilled applicators directly employed and supervised by firm specializing in this type of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. Domestic cold and hot water: 1. Sectional glass fiber insulation, thickness as listed below, having thermal conductivity of , not over 0.27 at 100'F. Provide white universal vapor barrier jacket with sealing lap. Minimum Pipe Insulation Requirements Nominal Pipe Size 1" and less 1Y4 to 2" 2W and larger Domestic Hot Water 1 inch 1 inch 1.5 inches Domestic Cold Water 0.5 inch 0.5 inch 0.5 inch B. Ductwork: 1. Ductwork: Insulate with thickness listed below and with vapor seal jacket. Washington Duct Type Duct Location Outside Airz Tempered Air Heatin Fully conditioned spaces R=7.0 N/A I R=3.3 2. Supply Ductwork, exposed in finished spaces or concealed where noted as sound ' attenuated duct: Line ductwork with thermal and acoustic material with installed thermal resistance matching above. See ductwork specification below. ' Piping less than 1" in diameter and less than 12 feet in length may be insulated with 0.5 inch insulation. 2 Outside Air ducts conveying un-tempered, outside air. 3 Supply and Return ducts conveying air above 55°F and below 105°F. MECHANICAL INSULATION (Performance Specification) 202500- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Piping: 1. Provide continuous insulation through hangers and supports with unbroken vapor seal on cold services. Seal to hanger inserts and to wall, ceiling or floor inserts. 2. Sectional Insulation. Jacket as specified. Neatly apply insulation with joint on top or back of piping. Butt insulation tightly at all side and end joints and at sleeves. Seal longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips smoothly with Benjamin Foster 85-20 or self-seal adhesive. For vapor barrier jacket, seal terminations with Benjamin Foster 30-35. ' 3. Seal around each joint of all exterior metal jacketed pipe with silicone mastic. 4. For cold services install continuous insulation and vapor barrier through sleeves, hangers and supports. 5. Insulate interior rain drain risers and roof drain sumps. B. Fittings and Valves: 1. One(1) inch and smaller, wrap firmly with 1 Ib. density glass fiber to match thickness of adjacent insulation and secure with 20 gauge galvanized wire. Coat smooth with insulating cement. 2. Three(3) inches and over, secure segments of molded insulation with 20 gauge galvanized wire. Coat smooth with insulating cement. 3. For hot services finish exposed fittings with glass fabric overlapped smoothly and applied with Benjamin Foster 30-36. 4. For cold services finish with glass fabric imbedded between two 1/16"thick coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35. On exposed fittings add glass fabric overlapped smoothly and applied with Benjamin Foster 30-36. Cover unions same materials as pipe, I.D. equal to O.D. ofPe iP 9 coverin and length three (3) diameters of union covering. Cement ends for vaP or seal. i 5. Zeston covers approved in place of fabric finish. C. Ducts: 1. On concealed ducts, lap joints 2" and staple. 2. On bottom of all rectangular ducts over 18"wide, use weld pins and self-locking caps within three(3) inches of the corners of each section of insulation and not to exceed 21" spacing to prevent sagging. 3. Do not insulate until ducts have been taped. 3.2 INSULATION JACKET INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum jacket sections with lap joint out of view. Install stainless steel bands at each joint, and at midpoint of jacket sections. Mitre jacket for elbows and other fittings. ' MECHANICAL INSULATION (Performance Specification) 202500-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Neatly mitre all joints, butt and completely seal all joints with adhesive cement. B. Provide removable(slit) sections of insulation on all valves, unions and other fittings which require periodic servicing. Size removable sections with I.D. to fit over piping insulation, secure with stainless steel worm drive hose clamps. C. For outside installations coat insulation with protective ultraviolet coating as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL INSULATION (Performance Specification) 202500-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL f SECTION 220000- PLUMBING (Performance Specification) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Provide plumbing fixtures with necessary trim, stops, and traps per manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide fittings and faucets by fixture manufacturer per latest catalog description for specified item, or as noted. Exposed trim polished chrome plated brass. Protect against damage before and after installation. B. Furnish stops with escutcheon plates at sinks, lavatories, water closets, and drinking fountains. C. Trim to have replaceable and interchangeable assemblies. D. Hot and cold valves open toward center. E. Seal inside and around outside edge of floor mounted water closets with black swan plastic putty and anchor solidly. F. Prime floor drain trap with Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. mechanical primer. Leave valve accessible for service. G. Furnish and install stainless steel Hudee rims where required. Set in white tile cement. On self rimming units use soft putty or mastic under bowl rim. H. Traps: 17 gage chrome plated brass tube. Install with solder bushing into stack and threaded joints for easy maintenance. I. Install 3/16"x 8"wide steel plates fastened to the studs for support of wall hung lavatories. Plate to extend one stud beyond each side of fixture. J. Fixtures to withstand 150 lb. pressure in any direction without displacement. Install firmly fixed blocking in wall for rigid support of fixture supplies. K. For sink sizes, first dimension is left to right, second dimension is front to back. PART PRODUCTS L 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Faucets: Chicago, Delta, American Standard, Kohler, Moen, Symmons, T &S, Zurn. B. Fixtures, Vitreous China: American Standard, Briggs, Crane, Kohler, Toto. C. Toilet Seats: Olsonite, Bemis, Kohler, American Standard. D. Insulation Kits: Truebro, McGuire, Zurn. E. Sinks, Stainless Steel: Elkay, Just, Moen F. Hose Bibbs: Jay R. Smith, Woodford, Zurn.. PLUMBING (Performance Specification) 220000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL G. Stops: McGuire, Speedway, Speedflex, Zurn or by fixture manufacturer connected with flexible chrome plated tubing. H. Water Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts, Febco or approved. 2.2 FIXTURES A. Reference Drawings. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Provide cleanouts where shown or required by Code as follows: 1. In floors, Smith 4023, nikalloy finish. 2. In walls of finished spaces, Smith 4472., chrome finish. 2.4 DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Bronze body with renewable stainless steel seat, replaceable disc, spring in sealed cage with large diaphragm area to accurately control downstream pressure with varying flow rates and upstream pressure. Provide optional bypass and "Y"strainer with perforated stainless steel screen ahead of each valve. E PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install fixtures in accord with manufacturer's instructions. B. Clean and flush traps. Thoroughly clean fixture surfaces with a non-abrasive cleanser. 3.2 SANITIZE PLUMBING PIPING A. Thoroughly sterilize entire domestic water system with solution containing not less than 200 parts per million of available chlorine. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in an approved manner. Allow sterilization solution to remain in system for period of 3 hours, during which time open and close valves and faucets several times. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION I PLUMBING (Performance Specification) 220000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 230000—HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Design-Build construction and reuse of(2)existing roof top constant volume electric heat pump HVAC units to service the Second Floor of the Clallam County 3rd Street Building. The requirements include demolition of existing HVAC ductwork, grilles and diffusers, all new ductwork and coordination-with other subcontractors. Design-Build requirements shall include the following: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM TYPE A. Space Heating and Air Conditioning: Packaged Roof Top Electric Heat Pump Units. 1. Retain existing packaged roof mounted heat pump units (RTU-1 and RTU-2)and thermostats serving the Second Floor. Retain existing restroom exhaust fans and verify they are ducted to outside of building. Where exhaust ducting is vented to attic, provide new ducting and terminate vent through bottom of roof eave soffit. a. RTU-1: (existing) Carrier 50EZA36-30 with outdoor air economizer and no power exhaust or relief air provision. Unit is 208/230 volt, 1 phase and uses R-410A. Located on East end of roof and currently serves East end of Second Floor. This unit will be used to serve the North side offices as part of the Design-Build requirements. b. RTU-2: (existing)York B2HP048A060A with outdoor air economizer and no power exhaust or relief air provision. Unit is 208/230 volt, 1 phase and uses R22. Located on West end of roof and currently serves West end of Second Floor. This unit will be used to serve the South side offices as part of the Design-Build requirements. C. RTU-3: (existing - N.I.C.) This unit is located on roof between RTU-1 and RTU-2 and serves the First Floor. Not part of this contract. 2. Demolish all duct work from RTU-1 and RTU-2 plenum drops to duct termination points including grilles, registers and diffusers. 2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC): 1. Air Distribution Design Build: a. RTU-1: Unit shall serve spaces with Northern exposure. Provide all new supply and return ductwork including grilles and diffusers for each separate office, staff and storage space. Each restroom shall have supply and exhaust air and comply with 2012 IMC ventilation requirements for restrooms. Design shall accommodate and make allowance for five(5)future VVT zones. Plans shall show location of future zone dampers and by-pass damper. At each location of future zone damper provide removable section of duct using S&D cleats or ductmate connector. Each location shall be accessible for installation and servicing of future zone damper without further ductwork modifications and/or routing. b. RTU-2: Unit shall serve interior core area and spaces with Southern exposure. Provide all new supply and return ductwork including grilles and diffusers for each HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) 230000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL separate office, conference and storage space. Each restroom shall have supply and exhaust air and comply with 2012 IMC ventilation requirements for restrooms. Design shall accommodate and make allowance for five(5)future VVT zones. Plans shall show location of future zone dampers and by-pass damper. At each location of future zone damper provide removable section of duct using S&D cleats or ductmate connector. Each location shall be accessible for installation and servicing of future zone damper without further ductwork modifications and/or routing. C. Provide 250 CFM exhaust fan and transfer grilles for IT CLOSET 223. Locate intake transfer grille in corridor wall near ceiling adjacent to IT closet. Route transfer duct in wall down to outlet grille near floor of IT closet. Operate exhaust fan from wall-mounted T-Stat(set at 75° F to close on temperature rise) in IT closet. Route exhaust duct above ceiling and terminate vent at bottom of roof eave/soffit. Vent termination shall have backdraft damper. B. HVAC Temperature Controls: 1. Temperature Controls: a. Relocate existing thermostats serving RTU-1 and RTU-2 to a location most representative of serving their respective spaces. RTU-1 thermostat has an existing remote sensor that shall be located in the main return duct riser to RTU-1. Add remote sensor to RTU-2 thermostat and locate in return duct riser to RTU-2. b. Provide a wall mounted mud-ring with blank cover for each future zone thermostat location to be added. Provide pull string or wire in wall from mud-ring to above ceiling T-Bar to facilitate future control wiring installation. ' C. Balancing and Commissioning: 1. Air Balance: a. Balance all air outlets. 2. Commissioning: Commission system as required by WSEC and local codes. 2.3 RIGID DUCT A. Ductwork essentially air tight and constructed per SMACNA manual"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Third Edition, 2015". B. Ducts, liners, sound attenuation, flex ducts, flex connections and adhesives carry label, "Incombustible", flame spread 0-25, NFPA-90A. Duro Dyne and Young Sheet Metal hardware. C. Duct sizes are net inside free area. Increase sheet metal dimensions where attenuation is specified. D. Equipment Connections: Make connection to fans and vibrating equipment with flexible fabric approved by NFPA, Ventfab or Asbestoseal. E. Volume Dampers (Manual): 1. Dampers two gages heavier than duct in which installed. Attach to square continuous rods ` through duct with"U" bolts as required. Dampers to provide tight shut-off. Handle style regulator, Duro Dyne Series SRHS or SRS. Regulator for insulated ducts, Duro Dyne Series SRST. Use end bearings on dampers, Duro Dyne SB. 2. On ducts lined with sound attenuating insulation, support damper rods on both ends with inside end bearings. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) 230000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3. Dampers in concealed locations provide concealed regulator, Duro Dyne SRC. F. Volume Dampers(Automatic): 1. Install control dampers furnished and located by control supplier. 2. Provide low leak dampers with the following maximum leakage rates as tested per AMCA Standard 500: a. Motorized: 4 cfm/ft2 of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g. b. Non-Motorized, 24 inches and smaller in any one dimension: 40 cfm/ft2 of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g. C. Non-Motorized, larger than 24 inches and larger in both dimensions: 20 cfm/ft2 of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g. G. Square throated elbows: Provide commercial manufactured turning vanes with single metal thickness vanes on 1-1/2" spacing or airfoil vanes on 2-1/2"spacing. H. Provide spin-ins with dampers and scoops at take-offs where shown, Gen-Flex SM1-DEL or equivalent. I. Sheet metal Duct: 1. Provide ASTM A-525 sheet metal with 1-1/4 oz. coating and bear stamp of manufacturer. 2. Tape joints of low velocity ductwork with fire resistant adhesive activated hardcast tape system. Hardcast, Vista or apply MP duct sealer per manufacture's recommendations for leak free joints. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Low velocity flexible connectors, glass fiber duct, U.L. 181, Class 1, labeled and meeting NFPA-90A, latest edition with vapor barrier jacket, 1"thick minimum walls wire reinforced and with K value not less than 0.24 at 75 degrees suitable for operation at 2400 fpm air velocity and 2" S.P. B. Provide with internal liner to completely shield air flow from glass fibers. C. Assemble joints with tape and cement in strict accord with manufacturer's instructions. Insulate metal fittings. Support duct at not to exceed 24"centers to avoid sagging. Genflex, J-M, Fiberglass, Thermaflex, Clevaform SFV, General Metalcraft. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PRODUCTS ' A. Ceiling Diffuser: Steel construction, square necked louver face diffuser with fixed air pattern, removable core. Provide with balance damper. Provide with off-white baked enamel finish. See Drawings. B. Ceiling Return: Provide with steel balance damper for ducted returns(No damper required on transfer grilles). See Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) 230000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 3.2 DUCTWORK A. Install in accord with SMACNA manual "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Third Edition, ' 2015". B. Do not exceed length of flexible duct as noted in Section 200100. C. Support ductwork from roof or walls. Provide system free from buckling, warping, breathing, air leakage or vibration. D. Install in manner that allows access to fire dampers, volume dampers, equipment, etc. E. Leave system in perfect working order and coordinate with System Air Balancer as to damper ' locations and settings. 3.3 AIR BALANCING A. Adjust all dampers to deliver air volumes designated on plans. Lock damper quadrants and mark position. Log all air volumes before and after adjustment at each air inlet, outlet and each ' fan. B. Do not begin balancing until mechanical systems are completed and in full working order. C. Submit logs in report form to Architect prior to final acceptance of project. Report to include the following: 1. Air volumes of each outlet& return before balancing. 2. Air volumes of each outlet& return after balancing. 3. Motor nameplate information (Manufacturer, RPM, HP, Maximum Ampere Draw)of each fan motor. 4. Operating Ampere Draw of each fan motor before and after balancing. 5. Shaft speed (RPM)for each fan before and after balancing. 6. For outside air damper adjustments provide temperature measurements for Outside, Return, and Mixed air to show that damper setting has been correctly adjusted. Report date and time when measurements were made. END OF SECTION HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Performance Specification) 230000-4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1 SECTION 260000—GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS(Performance Specification) PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section_is specifically applicable to the Basic Electrical Requirements,in addition to Division 01 —General Requirements. B. The General Conditions and General Requirements(Division 01) apply to this Section. C. This Section also includes provisions from Sections 260500, 261100, 261200, 261400, 264000, 264500 and 265000. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. A completed operating installation of all electrical systems specified and required shall be provided. All installations shall be in strict compliance with the Specifications, Drawings, General Conditions and Contract Terms, all applicable current State and Local Codes and Ordinances. In case of conflicts, the quality deemed best by the Owners Representative,will govern. B. This Work is Design/Build. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide lighting, power, fire alarm systems design, low voltage conduit, labor and material construction services associated with the demolition and remodeling of the existing East 3rd Street Building Area. Reference Architectural drawings for Area of Work. B. A State of Washington Licensed Supervising Electrician whom complies with State of Washington Requirements shall provide the Electrical design. C. Refer to Architectural Drawings for some required equipment, fixtures, etc. D. Contractor is to verify requirements and submit and obtain approval from Washington State Bureau of Labor and Industries, if required. Contractor is responsible for paying all costs for obtaining a permit. E. Contractor to submit to City of Port Angeles all required forms to comply with City of Port Angeles Rebate Program. 1.4 DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit electrical floor plans to the Architect on reproducible bond Architectural 22" x 34" drawings after gaining approval from Washington State Bureau of Labor and Industries, if applicable. Submit drawings on a disc in electronic format using AutoCAD version 2000. Show all details legibly and neatly. Architect to provide floor plan in electronic format for Contractors use. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 260000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Prior to final acceptance of this Work the Contractor shall submit the following to the Architect: 1. Electrical Design Drawings. 2. Record Drawings. 3. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Certificates of Code Authority Acceptance. 5. Contractors' Labor and Material Warrantees. , 6. Other project documentation specified herein. 1.5 CODES AND PERMITS A. This Work shall comply with the latest Rules and Regulations of the State and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction, National Electrical Code, International Fire and Building Codes. B. Obtain and pay for all required permits, plan check charges and certificates. Deliver Certificates of Acceptance from the Code-Enforcing Authorities to the Architect. 1.6 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CRAFTS A. Cooperate with other crafts (or contracts) as may be necessary for the proper execution of this ' Work. B. Coordinate with Owner's/low voltage vendor. Provide and install 3/4-inch diameter conduit for all devices indicated in Drawings. 1.7 INSPECTION, OBSERVATION AND TESTS , A. Provide one (1) journeyman, tools, meters, instruments and other test equipment required to properly complete the Work. Contractor to remove and replace trims, covers, fixtures, etc., and test materials, systems, methods and Workmanship in the presence of the Architect for final review at completion of this Work. 1.8 GUARANTEE AND CLEAN-UP A. Keep tools and materials in an orderly manner throughout the construction period. Upon ' completion of this Work; remove all excess materials, tools, dirt and debris from the job site. B. Leave the entire electrical system installed under this Work in clean, dust-free and proper , Working order. C. Without additional charge, replace any Work or material, which develops defects, except from abuse, within one(1)year from acceptance unless otherwise noted. D. Lamp guarantee is from date of Architect occupancy or acceptance, six (6) months for fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps. E. Labor for lamp installation is to be provided by the Contractor for a thirty(30)day period. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 260000-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL i1.9 SPREAD OF FIRE OR PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION A. Electrical installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts and ventilation or air-handling ducts shall be so made that the possible spread of fire or products of combustion will not be substantially increased. 'j PART 2—PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 260000 i i '1 1 1 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 260000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS(Performance Specification) PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Scratched, marred or deformed materials will not be accepted. B. Fixtures,material or equipment in wet cartons or boxes, stored in or exposed to rain, water, dust, dirt or snow are not acceptable. 1.2 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Electrical materials shall be of the type and quality indicated, new, listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, and shall bear their label wherever standards have been established and they regularly furnish label service. 1.3 MANUFACTURER A. Like items shall be from one manufacturer; i.e., fixture types, switches, receptacles, breakers, panels, etc. 1.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to completion of the job and before final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the Architect three (3) sets of operating and maintenance brochures for equipment installed. Operating and maintenance brochures shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, service representative, supplier for replacement parts, etc. B. Assemble data into individual sets and bind into plastic-covered, hard backed, loose-leaf binders arranged for side binding. Segregate respective items into related groups(starters, fixtures, etc.) ' and provide index tab for each group. C. At the completion of project, and at a time scheduled by the Architect, assemble key mechanics, vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the operating personnel. Instructions shall include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance. D. Provide all incidentals, hangers, brackets, supports, framing, backing, signal transformers, relays, etc. required to complete the system or systems, in a safe and satisfactory Working condition, shall be provided and installed as part of this Work. E. All openings associated with this Work shall be seated with EPO-TEC product number 200. 1.5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Provide Raychem ShrinkMark system Cable Markers. , BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS(Performance Specification) 260500- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. Nameplates shall be engraved three-layer laminated plastic,white letters on black background. 1.6 WIRING METHOD A. Wiring throughout area shall be metallic concealed raceway system with flush mounted outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. B. All Work shall be executed in a Workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. C. Cable and tree all wiring in panels, enclosures, and cabinets; for power, and signal. Use plastic ties in panels, enclosures, cabinets, and all open cable or wire installations. D. Wet, and Damp Location: Comply with Code requirements. E. Recondition or replace any damage to this Work or other crafts. 1.7 ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA A. Branch circuit loading shall be as follows: 1. Convenience outlets shall be calculated based upon a minimum of 200 volt-amperes per device. A maximum of 1,400 volt-amperes per 20-ampere 120V branch circuit shall be used. 2. Maximum lighting load per 20-ampere 120V branch circuit shall not exceed 1,500 volt- amperes. B. Devices: 1 1. Electrical device locations are indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 2. Branch circuits requiring extending and demolition shall be documented on Design/Build Drawings. C. Lighting and Controls: 1. Any new fixtures in the lighting system shall be designed utilizing energy efficient fluorescent 32 watt T8, 3,000K, CRI 82 lamps. Ballasts shall be fused protected, electronic solid state, with THD less than 10%. 2. The average illumination level shall be designed at twenty (20) foot-candles thirty (30) inches above finished floor. 3. The fixtures shall be recessed, with built-in emergency-light and battery back-up, as noted, to match existing and shall be approved by the Architect. 4. Lighting control design shall be from semi-flush ceiling mounted ultrasonic occupancy sensors. Sensors shall be time-delay adjustable (15 seconds to 15 minutes), and shall provide exhaust fan on/off control. D. Fire Alarm: 1. System design modifications shall be made in compliance with Local Fire Marshal approval. a. Fire alarm system for Project Area is to be separate zone as required by Fire Marshal. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 260500-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL E. Construction Documents: , 1. Provide neat, legible design scaled drawings to the Architect. Drawing to include symbol , schedule, power, lighting, and fire alarm system wiring details. 2. The electrical devices will be shown on the drawings circuited with home runs to respective panels. The phase conductor shall be shown as small line, the neutral conductor shall be shown as a larger line, and the ground conductor shall be shown as in figure 1_ Figure 1 3. There shall be a lighting floor plan with fixtures, controls, and branch circuiting shown. ' 4. There shall be one power and signal floor plan with device and fire alarm branch circuiting shown. 5. Provide symbol, fixture, and panel schedules on the drawings. 6. Provide lighting calculations either attached to the drawings or on 8 1/2"X 11" paper. 7. Record Drawings shall show all fixtures with types and all electrical devices with circuit numbers. 1.8 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION A. Distance of device outlet boxes above finished floor shall comply with ADA Disabilities Act, and at locations approved by the Architect. 1.9 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panel board doors in finished locations. D. Install branch circuit tape labels inside duplex receptacle finish plates. , 1.10 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical power distribution, fire alarm, and receptacles. Letter Height shall be 1/4 inch for main distribution panel, panel boards, and disconnect switches, and 1/8 inch for all other equipment. ' 1.11 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor at load connections, panel boards, pull boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 260500-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.12 SUPPORTS A. Conduits shall be supported from the structure. Penetration of roof deck is not permitted for hangers, clamps, etc. Provide metal conduit, pipe hangers/supports, and straps. Supports to provide(5)times ultimate weight of equipment to be supported. PART 2—PRODUCTS(Not Used) -PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 260500 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODSecification)Performance S 260500-4 ( p CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 261100—CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 CONDUITS AND SURFACE METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Provide Raceways and Conduits of specified types for all Electrical System Wiring. All Fittings, Boxes, Hangers and Appurtenances shall be included. B. Manufacturer: Triangle, National, Allied, Carlon, Greenfield or approved. 1. Zinc coated Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (E.M.T.). 2. Galvanized, interlocked Steel, flexible metallic Conduit and liquid-tight. 1.2 FITTINGS A. Manufacturer:Appleton, Efcor, Midwest, Raco, T& B, Steel City or approved. r 1. Threaded, insulated throat or plastic Bushings. 2. Insulated grounding Bushings. 3. Flex Connectors shall be malleable squeeze type. 4. E.M.T. Steel Set Screw Connectors and/or Couplings. 1.3 FASTENERS A. Manufacturer: Caddy, Minerallac or approved. 1. Con clips for support of Thin-wall Conduit or flexible metallic Conduit. 2. Conduit Clips for support of Conduit outside Beams. 3. EMT two hole Straps for support of Conduit from structure. 4. EMT Jiffy Clips for support of Flex Conduit. 1.4 BOXES A. Manufacturer: Raco, Steel-City, Bell, Hubbell, Appleton or approved. 1. Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears and knock out plugs, mounting type as required, 4"W x 1 1/2" D minimum. 2. Boxes exposed to weather and installed in contact with earth shall be cast iron alloy with gasketed screw cover and watertight hubs. 3. Solid gang box covers single, double as required and 3/4 inch. 4. Boxes exceeding 4 - 11/16 inch square shall be welded steel construction with screw ' cover. 5. Mud ring depth to be coordinated with finished materials depth. 1.5 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT , A. Conceal all Conduits in finished spaces. CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) 261100- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL B. All conduits are to be securely supported and fastened at six (6) foot intervals and within eighteen (18) inches of every outlet, ell, and panel termination. Conduit runs, which are grouped together or larger than 1-1/4 inch, are to be supported from building structure by Kindorf or Unistrut steel channel. C. Conduit may be sized to the minimum National Electric Code. Minimum conduit trade size shall be 1/2 inch. D. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. 1.6 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Flexible metal conduit shall be installed at ventilating equipment. ' B. All conduits shall be cut square, reamed smooth, and with all fittings drawn up tight. C. Jacket flexible metal conduit shall be installed at locations exposed to weather or damp areas. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) ' PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 261100 1 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) 261100-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 261200—CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) ' PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturer:Anaconda, Triangle, Hatfield, Rome or approved. B. All Branch Circuit and Feeder Conductors shall be 600-volt insulation, Copper soft drawn. C. Insulation types approved shall be THW, THHN, and THWN. Number 8 and larger shall be ' stranded Class B. D. The minimum Conductor size shall be number 12 AWG unless otherwise specified herein. , E. Color-code all Feeder and Branch Circuit Conductors in a consistent phase-to-phase manner. Phases A-B-C left-to-right and phases A-B-C top-to-bottom. F. Color coding of conductors: Phase-to-Phase Voltage Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Ground , Under 250-volts Black Red Blue White Green 1.2 CONNECTORS A. Branch Circuit Connectors shall be Scotch-Lok, Ideal Wire Nut, and Scotch 3M or approved. 1.3 CABLE SPLICES A. Split-bolt, compression terminal, tool applied sleeves, Burndy, Kearney or approved. ' B. Vinyl plastic electrical tape, flame-retardant, equal to Scotch#33 or approved. C. Termination lugs for number 12 AWG conductors and/or smaller shall be spade-flared tool applied. 1.4 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. B. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet. C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. I E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 261200- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 1.5 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. ' B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. C. Conductors routed through fluorescent fixtures, mounted in a continuous row shall have an Iinsulation rating not less than 90°Celsius. Conductors shall be rated as fixture wire. ' 1.6 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible ' temperature rise. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) 1 END OF SECTION 261200 1 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 261200-2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 261400—WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES (Performance Specification) PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 MATERIALS A. Wiring Devices shall be specification grade, Ivory color. , B. Acceptable grade Devices to those specified will be Pass & Seymour, Leviton, Hubbell or equal. All.Lighting Switches and Duplex Receptacles installed shall be of the same Manufacturer and ' have identical appearance. C. Receptacles: , 1. Duplex 20 ampere, 3-wire, 2-pole Grounding. Hubbell 5362 series, Leviton 5362 series or equal. 1.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches with OFF position down. ' B. Install wall mounted convenience receptacles grounding pole on bottom. ' C. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. D. Devices and Finish Plates shall be installed, plumb with Building lines. Finish Plates and Devices , shall not be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered Finish Plates and Devices will not be accepted. E. Receptacles shall be tested for polarity. ' PART 2—PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 261400 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES(Performance Specification) 261400- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' SECTION 264000 - SERVICE, METERING, DISTRIBUTION AND PANELBOARDS (Performance Specification) PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SERVICE A. New Service Panel: 1. New 800 AMP Service Panel: ' a. Set new 800 amp service panel in Room 206, West wall; the new panel is to go where the existing panel is located per Owner request. b. Panel shall have main circuit breaker and sub breakers to feed each of the existing panels at their existing capacities. C. Provide provisions for 3 additional future breakers 225 amp frame size. d. Provide surge suppressor for panel, external mount connect to dedicated circuit breaker. Surge suppressor Innovative Technologies PTE, 100 KA per phase or Current Technologies, TransGuard TG3 200 KA per phase in steel enclosure. 2. Mount CT and meter outside of the building, opposite of the new panel. 3. New Weather Head and Overhead Service: a. Provide new weather head and overhead service and service feeders as required; coordinate closely with City of Port Angeles Electrical Utility. b. If new weather head is required then all roof penetration work shall be coordinated with roofing manufacturer to retain roof warranty. 4. New Conduit and Feeders: a. Provide new conduit and copper feeders with full sized neutral and equipment ground wire routed inside of the building to each of the existing service panels which remain and to any new/relocated panels. b. Coordinate cut over to the new panel closely with the County and minimize down time. Assume work during off hours. C. Remove all panels, meter banks, meters, conduit weather head, and wire associated with the service change and re-feeding of existing electrical panels. Any and all roof related work shall be coordinated with roofing manufacturer to ' retain roof warranty. d. Provide all paint, patch and building and site repair as required for removed equipment, panels, meter bank, weather head, conduit, etc. e. Arrange to refill generator propane tank at end of power transfer/work. B. Coordinate electrical service connections with serving utility representative. ' C. Obtain available short circuit current from utility and provide system rated to withstand this value plus 25 percent. D. Include in Bid all Utility line extension/connection charges and fees for this Project. Reference ' utility contacts list on Drawings and obtain detailed charges from serving utility. SERVICE, METERING, DISTRIBUTION AND PANELBOARDS 264000- 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1.2 PANELBOARDS ' A. Reference Attachments to this Section for schedules. B. Provide labeling per Section 260500. 1.3 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit complete and descriptive electronic shop drawings of Main Service Disconnects, Distribution Panelboard and Branch Panelboards. Submittal shall include Contractor's proposed layout(1/2"= 1'-0"scale or dimensioned) of equipment in available space. B. Submit Operating and Maintenance Instructions. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. SQUARE D, SEIMENS, GENERAL ELECTRIC, CUTLER-HAMMER. B. Engineer Approved Alternative. ' 2.2 MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECTS ' A. Fusible switches (600 amp and smaller): NEMA KS 1; fuse clips to accommodate U.L. Class R fuses only. B. Provide ONE-LINE Drawing to meet requirements. , 2.3 UTILITY METERING A. Cooperate with serving utility to install equipment furnished by utility. B. Run 1.5" Rigid metal conduit(RMC)from CT cabinet to remote mounted CT Meter base. , 2.4 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (400 TO 800 AMP) A. Distribution Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker as indicated on Drawings. B. Enclosure: Type 1, screw cover, standard finish. ' C. Bussing: Copper with tin plating. Half ground bus. D. Voltage, amperage and integrated equipment rating as shown on Drawings. E. Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. ' SERVICE, METERING, DISTRIBUTION AND PANELBOARDS 264000-2 ' ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL ' 2.5 BRANCH PANELBOARDS (225 AMP AND BELOW) A. Panelboards: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type. B. Cabinets: Type 1; galvanized steel with standard spray finish, mono-flat front trim, and door. Doors: Flush-type lock latches, all keyed alike. Furnish two keys with each lock. Trims to be separately packed and protected from scratching and marring. C. Bus: Copper, suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers. Provide grounding bus for connection of grounding conductors. Provide isolated ground bus for panelboards as noted on Drawings. D. Circuit Breakers: Not less than 3/4-inch on centers; securely fastened to prevent movement; rated not less than 10000 Aic at 240 volts but shall be series rated with Distribution and Main ' service gear to withstand available fault currents. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Conform to serving utility requirements. B. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Properly balance single phase loads on three phase panelboards. ' END OF SECTION 264000 SERVICE, METERING, DISTRIBUTION AND PANELBOARDS 264000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 264500-GROUNDING (Performance Specification) ' PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, and duplex receptacle grounds. 1.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper ' installation. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) ' END OF SECTION 264500 ' GROUNDING (Performance Specification) 264500- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 265000—LIGHTING (Performance Specification) PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide luminaires with lamps and supports as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. If the catalog number of a specified luminaire conflicts with the luminaire description or these ' specifications, then bring such conflicts to the attention of the Architect prior to bidding. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings in accordance with Section 260000. Include a master list of luminaires used on project showing: Luminaire type, brief description, luminaire manufacturer and catalog number, ballast manufacturer and catalog number and lamp manufacturer and catalog number. B. Verify that luminaire description matches the specified catalog number. C. Indicate on the submitted items the features mentioned in the luminaire list. D. Boldly indicate delivery lead-time for each luminaire type and critical path order date. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. See Lighting Schedules on Drawings for acceptable manufacturers. B. Requests for substitution of other products will be considered if submitted in accordance with Section 012500. C. Substitution requests must include: Luminaire construction data(printed data sheet)and IES format photometric data. Requests lacking this data will be rejected. 2.2 MATERIALS ' A. Steel: Painted before or after fabrication. No exposed sharp edges allowed. B. Aluminum: Formed sheet or cast, polyester powder coat painted. ' C. Acrylic prismatic lenses: equivalent to KSH-12 as manufactured by the K-Lite Division of ICI Acrylics Inc. D. Polycarbonate lenses& housings: UV and heat stabilized. E. Glass lenses: tempered, shatter-resistant. ' 2.3 BALLASTS&TRANSFORMERS A. Ballasts shall be capable of providing reliable operation of the lamps at the lowest temperature normally encountered in the environment where the luminaire is located. ' B. Electronic fluorescent ballasts shall be as follows: LIGHTING (Performance Specification) 265000-1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET , BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Programmed Rapid Start lamp operation. 2. Listed by Recognized Testing Laboratory(ETL, UL), thermally protected, UL Class P, non-PCB, Class"A"sound rated. 3. Operate lamps at a frequency of 42 KHz or higher with no visible flicker (less than 3 percent flicker index). 4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)of less than 10%. 5. Power Factor(PF)equal to or greater than 98%. ' 6. Ballast Factor(BF) greater than 0.85 and less than 1.25. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor(LCCF) less than 1.7. , 8. Minimum lamp starting temperature: 50 degrees F. 9. Meet current Federal, State and local Power Co. efficiency standards and rebate program requirements. 10. The electronic ballast shall withstand input power line transients as defined in ' ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A. The ballast shall maintain constant light output over a line voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent from standard. 11. Meet current ANSI, IEEE and FCC Regulations Part 18 for EMI/RFI, harmonic distortion and transient protection. 12. Provide normal lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturer. 13. Minimum 5-year ballast replacement and $10 per ballast replacement labor ' warranty. 14. Approved manufacturers: ADVANCE or Architect approved substitution. C. Electronic Ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps: 1. Meet requirements of above paragraph 2.3 B with the following modifications 2. Rapid start lamp operation, BF greater than 0.93, LCCF less than 1.7, ' Minimum starting temp of zero degrees F, 5 year ballast replacement warranty. 3. Approved manufacturers: ADVANCE or Architect approved substitution. D. Ballasts and transformers deemed excessively noisy shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. ' 2.4 LAMPS A. T5 type Fluorescent lamps shall have 4100 Degree Kelvin lamp phosphor color and a , minimum CRI of 85 unless noted otherwise in Lighting Schedules. B. T8 type Fluorescent lamps shall have 4100 Degree Kelvin lamp phosphor color and a minimum CRI of 82 unless noted otherwise in Lighting Schedules. C. Compact Fluorescent lamps shall have 4100 Degree Kelvin lamp phosphor color and a minimum CRI of 82 unless noted otherwise in Lighting Schedules. ' D. Low voltage(12 volt) Halogen lamps shall have integral cover glass. E. Acceptable lamp manufacturers: GENERAL ELECTRIC, OSRAM SYLVANIA, and ' PHILIPS. LIGHTING (Performance Specification) 265000-2 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL F. All lamps in a particular luminaire type shall be of one manufacturer. G. All lamps and luminaires shall be in proper operation at the time of acceptance. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION I A. Luminaires installed under this work shall be properly and adequately supported from the building structure, except where ceiling construction or other provisions are specifically designed to support the luminaire units. Provide seismic supports and bracing per local code requirements. ' B. Luminaire supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of luminaires and shall be arranged to maintain the alignment at all times. The Architect shall give the final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment. ' C. All light outlets shall be supplied with a luminaire. Outlet symbols on the drawings without a type designation shall have a luminaire the same as those used in similar or like locations. D. Luminaires shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work and every lamp shall be in operation. The responsibility for cleaning or protecting luminaires from dirt, dust, paint, debris, etc., shall rest with the Contractor performing this Division of work. E. Where luminaires are mounted under cabinets, in soffits, coves, or other physically restricting spaces, the Contractor shall verify that the luminaires will fit the space ' prior to ordering. ' END OF SECTION 265000 ' LIGHTING (Performance Specification) 265000-3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET ' BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL SECTION 321216-ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pavement-marking paint. , 2. Relocation/replacement of existing wheel stops, as required. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with ' international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of , manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 AUXILIARY MATERIALS ' A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. ASPHALT PAVING 321216- 1 ' CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 2 REMODEL 1. Color: White. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified ' with Owner. B. Sweep, pressure wash and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. ' C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 3.2 WHEEL STOPS A. Relocate existing wheel stops as required. Replace any wheel stops that are broken or break during relocation. B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. ' END OF SECTION 321216 t i ASPHALT PAVING 321216-2